JP2024033016A - Organic electroluminescent devices and electronic equipment - Google Patents

Abstract

An object of the present invention is to provide an organic EL element with improved luminous efficiency. [Solution] An organic EL device that includes a first light-emitting layer and a second light-emitting layer, the first light-emitting layer containing a first host material, and the second light-emitting layer containing a second light-emitting layer. The first light-emitting layer contains a host material, the first host material and the second host material are different from each other, and the first light-emitting layer contains at least a first light-emitting compound that emits light with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less; The second light-emitting layer includes at least a second light-emitting compound that emits light with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less, and the total thickness of the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer is 20 nm or less, The first luminescent compound and the second luminescent compound are the same or different from each other, and the triplet energy T1 (H1) of the first host material and the triplet energy of the second host material An organic EL element in which T1 (H2) satisfies the relationship of the following formula (Math. 1). T1(H1)>T1(H2)...(Math. 1) [Selection diagram] Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to an organic electroluminescent device and an electronic device.

Organic electroluminescent elements (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "organic EL elements") are applied to full-color displays such as mobile phones and televisions. When a voltage is applied to the organic EL element, holes are injected from the anode into the emissive layer, and electrons are injected from the cathode into the emissive layer. Then, in the light emitting layer, the injected holes and electrons recombine to form excitons. At this time, according to the statistical law of electron spin, singlet excitons are generated at a rate of 25%, and triplet excitons are generated at a rate of 75%.
In order to improve the performance of organic EL devices, various studies have been made on compounds used in organic EL devices, for example, in Patent Documents 1 to 4 and 6 to 7. Furthermore, in order to improve the performance of organic EL devices, Patent Document 5 describes a phenomenon in which singlet excitons are generated by collisional fusion of two triplet excitons (hereinafter referred to as Triplet-Triplet Fusion=TTF phenomenon). ) is stated.
Examples of the performance of an organic EL element include brightness, emission wavelength, chromaticity, luminous efficiency, driving voltage, and life span.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-157552 JP2009-016478A International Publication No. 2007/138906 US Patent Application Publication No. 2019/280209 International Publication No. 2010/134350 JP2007-294261A JP 2019-161218 Publication

One of the objects of the present invention is to provide an organic electroluminescent device with improved performance. Another object of the present invention is to provide an organic electroluminescent device with improved luminous efficiency, and to provide an electronic device equipped with the organic electroluminescent device.

According to one aspect of the present invention, an organic electroluminescent device comprising:
A first light-emitting layer and a second light-emitting layer are included between the anode and the cathode,
The first light-emitting layer includes a first host material,
The second light emitting layer includes a second host material,
the first host material and the second host material are different from each other,
The first light-emitting layer includes at least a first light-emitting compound that emits light with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less,
The second light-emitting layer includes at least a second light-emitting compound that emits light with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less,
The total thickness of the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer is 20 nm or less,
the first luminescent compound and the second luminescent compound are the same or different,
An organic electroluminescent device is provided in which the triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material and the triplet energy T ₁ (H2) of the second host material satisfy the relationship of the following formula (Equation 1). be done.
T ₁ (H1)>T ₁ (H2)...(Math. 1)

According to one aspect of the present invention, an organic electroluminescent device comprising:
A first light-emitting layer and a second light-emitting layer are included between the anode and the cathode,
The first light-emitting layer includes a first host material,
The second light emitting layer includes a second host material,
the first host material and the second host material are different from each other,
The first light-emitting layer includes at least a first light-emitting compound that emits light with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less,
The second light-emitting layer includes at least a second light-emitting compound that emits light with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less,
The ratio of the total film thickness of the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer to the distance between the cathode and the second light-emitting layer (the ratio of the total thickness of the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer) the total film thickness of the layers/distance between the cathode and the second light emitting layer) is 0.8 or less,
the first luminescent compound and the second luminescent compound are the same or different,
An organic electroluminescent device is provided in which the triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material and the triplet energy T ₁ (H2) of the second host material satisfy the relationship of the following formula (Equation 1). be done.
T ₁ (H1)>T ₁ (H2)...(Math. 1)

According to one aspect of the present invention, there is provided an electronic device equipped with the organic electroluminescent element according to the above-described one aspect of the present invention.

According to one aspect of the present invention, an organic electroluminescent device with improved performance can be provided. Further, according to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide an organic electroluminescent element with improved luminous efficiency. Further, according to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide an electronic device equipped with the organic electroluminescent element.

FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of an example of an organic electroluminescent device according to a first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of an example of an organic electroluminescent device according to a second embodiment.

[Definition]
In this specification, the hydrogen atom includes isotopes having different numbers of neutrons, ie, light hydrogen (protium), deuterium (deuterium), and tritium (tritium).

In this specification, in a chemical structural formula, a hydrogen atom, that is, a light hydrogen atom, a deuterium atom, or Assume that tritium atoms are bonded.

In this specification, the number of carbon atoms forming a ring refers to the number of carbon atoms constituting the ring itself of a compound having a structure in which atoms are bonded in a cyclic manner (for example, a monocyclic compound, a fused ring compound, a bridged compound, a carbocyclic compound, and a heterocyclic compound). represents the number of carbon atoms among the atoms. When the ring is substituted with a substituent, the carbon contained in the substituent is not included in the number of carbon atoms forming the ring. The "number of ring carbon atoms" described below is the same unless otherwise specified. For example, a benzene ring has 6 carbon atoms, a naphthalene ring has 10 carbon atoms, a pyridine ring has 5 carbon atoms, and a furan ring has 4 carbon atoms. Further, for example, the number of ring carbon atoms in the 9,9-diphenylfluorenyl group is 13, and the number of ring carbon atoms in the 9,9'-spirobifluorenyl group is 25.
Further, when the benzene ring is substituted with an alkyl group as a substituent, for example, the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is not included in the number of carbon atoms forming the benzene ring. Therefore, the number of ring carbon atoms in the benzene ring substituted with an alkyl group is 6. Further, when the naphthalene ring is substituted with an alkyl group as a substituent, for example, the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is not included in the number of carbon atoms forming the naphthalene ring. Therefore, the number of ring carbon atoms in the naphthalene ring substituted with an alkyl group is 10.

In this specification, the number of ring-forming atoms refers to compounds with a structure in which atoms are bonded in a cyclic manner (e.g., monocyclic, fused ring, and ring assembly) (e.g., monocyclic compound, fused ring compound, bridged compound, carbocyclic compound). Represents the number of atoms that constitute the ring itself (compounds and heterocyclic compounds). Atoms that do not form a ring (for example, a hydrogen atom that terminates a bond between atoms that form a ring) and atoms that are included in a substituent when the ring is substituted with a substituent are not included in the number of ring-forming atoms. The "number of ring-forming atoms" described below is the same unless otherwise specified. For example, the number of ring atoms in the pyridine ring is 6, the number of ring atoms in the quinazoline ring is 10, and the number of ring atoms in the furan ring is 5. For example, the number of hydrogen atoms bonded to the pyridine ring or atoms constituting substituents is not included in the number of atoms forming the pyridine ring. Therefore, the number of ring atoms of the pyridine ring to which hydrogen atoms or substituents are bonded is six. Furthermore, for example, hydrogen atoms bonded to carbon atoms of the quinazoline ring or atoms constituting substituents are not included in the number of ring-forming atoms of the quinazoline ring. Therefore, the number of ring atoms in the quinazoline ring to which hydrogen atoms or substituents are bonded is 10.

In the present specification, "carbon number XX to YY" in the expression "substituted or unsubstituted ZZ group with carbon number XX to YY" represents the number of carbon atoms when the ZZ group is unsubstituted, and is substituted. Do not include the number of carbon atoms in substituents. Here, "YY" is larger than "XX", "XX" means an integer of 1 or more, and "YY" means an integer of 2 or more.

In this specification, "number of atoms XX to YY" in the expression "substituted or unsubstituted ZZ group with number of atoms XX to YY" represents the number of atoms when the ZZ group is unsubstituted, and is substituted. Do not include the number of atoms of substituents in case. Here, "YY" is larger than "XX", "XX" means an integer of 1 or more, and "YY" means an integer of 2 or more.

In this specification, an unsubstituted ZZ group refers to a case where a "substituted or unsubstituted ZZ group" is an "unsubstituted ZZ group", and a substituted ZZ group refers to a "substituted or unsubstituted ZZ group". represents the case where is a "substituted ZZ group".
In the present specification, "unsubstituted" in the case of "substituted or unsubstituted ZZ group" means that the hydrogen atom in the ZZ group is not replaced with a substituent. The hydrogen atom in the "unsubstituted ZZ group" is a light hydrogen atom, a deuterium atom, or a tritium atom.
Moreover, in this specification, "substituted" in the case of "substituted or unsubstituted ZZ group" means that one or more hydrogen atoms in the ZZ group are replaced with a substituent. "Substitution" in the case of "BB group substituted with AA group" similarly means that one or more hydrogen atoms in the BB group are replaced with an AA group.

"Substituents described herein"
The substituents described in this specification will be explained below.

The number of ring carbon atoms in the "unsubstituted aryl group" described herein is 6 to 50, preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 18, unless otherwise specified herein. .
The number of ring atoms of the "unsubstituted heterocyclic group" described herein is 5 to 50, preferably 5 to 30, more preferably 5 to 18, unless otherwise specified herein. be.
The number of carbon atoms in the "unsubstituted alkyl group" described herein is 1 to 50, preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 6, unless otherwise specified herein.
The number of carbon atoms in the "unsubstituted alkenyl group" described herein is 2 to 50, preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 6, unless otherwise specified herein.
The number of carbon atoms in the "unsubstituted alkynyl group" described herein is 2 to 50, preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 6, unless otherwise specified herein.
Unless otherwise specified herein, the number of ring carbon atoms in the "unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" described herein is 3 to 50, preferably 3 to 20, more preferably 3 to 6. be.
Unless otherwise specified herein, the number of ring carbon atoms in the "unsubstituted arylene group" described herein is 6 to 50, preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 18. .
The number of ring atoms of the "unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group" described herein is 5 to 50, preferably 5 to 30, more preferably 5 unless otherwise specified herein. ~18.
The number of carbon atoms in the "unsubstituted alkylene group" described herein is 1 to 50, preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 6, unless otherwise specified herein.

・“Substituted or unsubstituted aryl group”
Specific examples (specific example group G1) of the "substituted or unsubstituted aryl group" described in this specification include the following unsubstituted aryl groups (specific example group G1A) and substituted aryl groups (specific example group G1B). ) etc. (Here, the unsubstituted aryl group refers to the case where the "substituted or unsubstituted aryl group" is an "unsubstituted aryl group", and the substituted aryl group refers to the case where the "substituted or unsubstituted aryl group" is (Refers to the case where it is a "substituted aryl group.") In this specification, the mere mention of "aryl group" includes both "unsubstituted aryl group" and "substituted aryl group."
"Substituted aryl group" means a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms of "unsubstituted aryl group" are replaced with a substituent. Examples of the "substituted aryl group" include a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms of the "unsubstituted aryl group" in the specific example group G1A below are replaced with a substituent, and a substituted aryl group in the following specific example group G1B. Examples include: The examples of "unsubstituted aryl group" and "substituted aryl group" listed here are just examples, and the "substituted aryl group" described in this specification includes the following specific examples. A group in which the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom of the aryl group itself in the "substituted aryl group" of Group G1B is further replaced with a substituent, and a hydrogen atom of the substituent in the "substituted aryl group" in the following specific example group G1B is Furthermore, groups substituted with substituents are also included.

・Unsubstituted aryl group (specific example group G1A):
phenyl group,
p-biphenyl group,
m-biphenyl group,
o-biphenyl group,
p-terphenyl-4-yl group,
p-terphenyl-3-yl group,
p-terphenyl-2-yl group,
m-terphenyl-4-yl group,
m-terphenyl-3-yl group,
m-terphenyl-2-yl group,
o-terphenyl-4-yl group,
o-terphenyl-3-yl group,
o-terphenyl-2-yl group,
1-naphthyl group,
2-naphthyl group,
anthryl group,
benzanthryl group,
phenanthryl group,
benzophenanthryl group,
phenalenyl group,
pyrenyl group,
chrysenyl group,
benzocrysenyl group,
triphenylenyl group,
benzotriphenylenyl group,
tetracenyl group,
pentacenyl group,
fluorenyl group,
9,9'-spirobifluorenyl group,
benzofluorenyl group,
dibenzofluorenyl group,
fluoranthenyl group,
benzofluoranthenyl group,
A monovalent aryl group derived by removing one hydrogen atom from a perylenyl group and a ring structure represented by the following general formulas (TEMP-1) to (TEMP-15).

・Substituted aryl group (specific example group G1B):
o-tolyl group,
m-tolyl group,
p-tolyl group,
para-xylyl group,
meta-xylyl group,
ortho-xylyl group,
para-isopropylphenyl group,
meta-isopropylphenyl group,
ortho-isopropylphenyl group,
para-t-butylphenyl group,
meta-t-butylphenyl group,
ortho-t-butylphenyl group,
3,4,5-trimethylphenyl group,
9,9-dimethylfluorenyl group,
9,9-diphenylfluorenyl group,
9,9-bis(4-methylphenyl)fluorenyl group,
9,9-bis(4-isopropylphenyl)fluorenyl group,
9,9-bis(4-t-butylphenyl)fluorenyl group,
cyanophenyl group,
triphenylsilylphenyl group,
trimethylsilylphenyl group,
phenylnaphthyl group,
A group in which one or more hydrogen atoms of a monovalent group derived from a naphthylphenyl group and a ring structure represented by the above general formulas (TEMP-1) to (TEMP-15) are replaced with a substituent.

・“Substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group”
The "heterocyclic group" described herein is a cyclic group containing at least one heteroatom as a ring-forming atom. Specific examples of heteroatoms include nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, sulfur atom, silicon atom, phosphorus atom, and boron atom.
A "heterocyclic group" as described herein is a monocyclic group or a fused ring group.
A "heterocyclic group" as described herein is an aromatic heterocyclic group or a non-aromatic heterocyclic group.
Specific examples of the "substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group" (specific example group G2) described in this specification include the following unsubstituted heterocyclic group (specific example group G2A) and substituted heterocyclic group ( Examples include specific example group G2B). (Here, the term "unsubstituted heterocyclic group" refers to the case where "substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group" is "unsubstituted heterocyclic group", and the term "substituted heterocyclic group" refers to "substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group"). "Heterocyclic group" refers to a "substituted heterocyclic group.") In this specification, simply "heterocyclic group" refers to "unsubstituted heterocyclic group" and "substituted heterocyclic group." including both.
"Substituted heterocyclic group" means a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms of "unsubstituted heterocyclic group" are replaced with a substituent. Specific examples of the "substituted heterocyclic group" include a group in which the hydrogen atom of the "unsubstituted heterocyclic group" in specific example group G2A is replaced, and examples of substituted heterocyclic groups in specific example group G2B below. Can be mentioned. The examples of "unsubstituted heterocyclic group" and "substituted heterocyclic group" listed here are just examples, and the "substituted heterocyclic group" described in this specification includes specific examples. A group in which the hydrogen atom bonded to the ring-forming atom of the heterocyclic group itself in the "substituted heterocyclic group" in example group G2B is further replaced with a substituent, and a substituent in the "substituted heterocyclic group" in specific example group G2B Also included are groups in which the hydrogen atom is further replaced with a substituent.

Specific example group G2A includes, for example, the following unsubstituted heterocyclic groups containing a nitrogen atom (specific example group G2A1), unsubstituted heterocyclic groups containing an oxygen atom (specific example group G2A2), and unsubstituted heterocyclic groups containing a sulfur atom. heterocyclic group (specific example group G2A3), and a monovalent heterocyclic group derived by removing one hydrogen atom from the ring structure represented by the following general formulas (TEMP-16) to (TEMP-33) (Specific example group G2A4).

Specific example group G2B includes, for example, the following substituted heterocyclic groups containing a nitrogen atom (specific example group G2B1), substituted heterocyclic groups containing an oxygen atom (specific example group G2B2), and substituted heterocyclic groups containing a sulfur atom. group (Specific Example Group G2B3), and one or more hydrogen atoms of a monovalent heterocyclic group derived from a ring structure represented by the following general formulas (TEMP-16) to (TEMP-33) are substituents. Includes substituted groups (Example Group G2B4).

・Unsubstituted heterocyclic group containing a nitrogen atom (specific example group G2A1):
pyrrolyl group,
imidazolyl group,
pyrazolyl group,
triazolyl group,
Tetrazolyl group,
oxazolyl group,
isoxazolyl group,
oxadiazolyl group,
thiazolyl group,
isothiazolyl group,
thiadiazolyl group,
pyridyl group,
pyridazinyl group,
pyrimidinyl group,
pyrazinyl group,
triazinyl group,
indolyl group,
isoindolyl group,
indolizinyl group,
quinolidinyl group,
quinolyl group,
isoquinolyl group,
cinnolyl group,
phthalazinyl group,
quinazolinyl group,
quinoxalinyl group,
benzimidazolyl group,
indazolyl group,
phenanthrolinyl group,
phenanthridinyl group,
acridinyl group,
phenazinyl group,
carbazolyl group,
benzocarbazolyl group,
morpholino group,
phenoxazinyl group,
phenothiazinyl group,
Azacarbazolyl group and diazacarbazolyl group.

・Unsubstituted heterocyclic group containing an oxygen atom (specific example group G2A2):
frill group,
oxazolyl group,
isoxazolyl group,
oxadiazolyl group,
xanthenyl group,
benzofuranyl group,
isobenzofuranyl group,
dibenzofuranyl group,
naphthobenzofuranyl group,
benzoxazolyl group,
benzisoxazolyl group,
phenoxazinyl group,
morpholino group,
dinaphthofuranyl group,
azadibenzofuranyl group,
diazadibenzofuranyl group,
Azanaphthobenzofuranyl group, and diazanaphthobenzofuranyl group.

・Unsubstituted heterocyclic group containing a sulfur atom (specific example group G2A3):
thienyl group,
thiazolyl group,
isothiazolyl group,
Thiadiazolyl group,
benzothiophenyl group (benzothienyl group),
Isobenzothiophenyl group (isobenzothienyl group),
dibenzothiophenyl group (dibenzothienyl group),
naphthobenzothiophenyl group (naphthobenzothienyl group),
benzothiazolyl group,
benzisothiazolyl group,
phenothiazinyl group,
dinaphthothiophenyl group (dinaphthothienyl group),
Azadibenzothiophenyl group (azadibenzothienyl group),
Diazadibenzothiophenyl group (diazadibenzothienyl group),
Azanaphthobenzothiophenyl group (azanaphthobenzothienyl group), and diazanaphthobenzothiophenyl group (diazanaphthobenzothienyl group).

- Monovalent heterocyclic groups derived by removing one hydrogen atom from the ring structures represented by the following general formulas (TEMP-16) to (TEMP-33) (specific example group G2A4):

In the general formulas (TEMP-16) to (TEMP-33), X _A and Y _A are each independently an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, NH, or CH ₂ . However, at least one of X _A and Y _A is an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or NH.
In the general formulas (TEMP-16) to (TEMP-33), when at least one of X _A and Y _A is NH or CH ₂ , in the general formulas (TEMP-16) to (TEMP-33), The monovalent heterocyclic group derived from the represented ring structure includes a monovalent group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from these NH or CH ₂ .

・Substituted heterocyclic group containing a nitrogen atom (specific example group G2B1):
(9-phenyl)carbazolyl group,
(9-biphenylyl)carbazolyl group,
(9-phenyl)phenylcarbazolyl group,
(9-naphthyl)carbazolyl group,
diphenylcarbazol-9-yl group,
phenylcarbazol-9-yl group,
methylbenzimidazolyl group,
ethylbenzimidazolyl group,
phenyltriazinyl group,
biphenylyltriazinyl group,
diphenyltriazinyl group,
phenylquinazolinyl group, and biphenylylquinazolinyl group.

・Substituted heterocyclic group containing an oxygen atom (specific example group G2B2):
phenyldibenzofuranyl group,
methyldibenzofuranyl group,
t-butyldibenzofuranyl group and a monovalent residue of spiro[9H-xanthene-9,9'-[9H]fluorene].

・Substituted heterocyclic group containing a sulfur atom (specific example group G2B3):
phenyldibenzothiophenyl group,
methyldibenzothiophenyl group,
A t-butyldibenzothiophenyl group and a monovalent residue of spiro[9H-thioxanthene-9,9'-[9H]fluorene].

- A group in which one or more hydrogen atoms of a monovalent heterocyclic group derived from the ring structure represented by the general formulas (TEMP-16) to (TEMP-33) is replaced with a substituent (specific example group G2B4) ):

The above-mentioned "one or more hydrogen atoms of a monovalent heterocyclic group" refers to a hydrogen atom bonded to a ring-forming carbon atom of the monovalent heterocyclic group, and at least one of XA and YA is NH. It means one or more hydrogen atoms selected from the hydrogen atom bonded to the nitrogen atom in the case where XA and YA are CH2, and the hydrogen atom of the methylene group when one of XA and YA is CH2.

・“Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group”
Specific examples of the "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" (specific example group G3) described in this specification include the following unsubstituted alkyl groups (specific example group G3A) and substituted alkyl groups (specific example group G3B). ). (Here, an unsubstituted alkyl group refers to a case where a "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" is an "unsubstituted alkyl group," and a substituted alkyl group refers to a case where a "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" is (Refers to the case where it is a "substituted alkyl group.") Hereinafter, when it is simply referred to as an "alkyl group," it includes both an "unsubstituted alkyl group" and a "substituted alkyl group."
"Substituted alkyl group" means a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms in "unsubstituted alkyl group" are replaced with a substituent. Specific examples of the "substituted alkyl group" include groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms in the "unsubstituted alkyl group" (specific example group G3A) below are replaced with a substituent, and substituted alkyl groups (specific examples Examples include group G3B). In this specification, the alkyl group in "unsubstituted alkyl group" means a chain alkyl group. Therefore, the "unsubstituted alkyl group" includes a linear "unsubstituted alkyl group" and a branched "unsubstituted alkyl group". The examples of "unsubstituted alkyl group" and "substituted alkyl group" listed here are just examples, and the "substituted alkyl group" described in this specification includes specific example group G3B. A group in which the hydrogen atom of the alkyl group itself in the "substituted alkyl group" in "Substituted alkyl group" is further replaced with a substituent, and a group in which the hydrogen atom of the substituent in the "substituted alkyl group" in Example Group G3B is further replaced with a substituent. included.

・Unsubstituted alkyl group (specific example group G3A):
methyl group,
ethyl group,
n-propyl group,
isopropyl group,
n-butyl group,
isobutyl group,
s-butyl group and t-butyl group.

・Substituted alkyl group (specific example group G3B):
heptafluoropropyl group (including isomers),
pentafluoroethyl group,
2,2,2-trifluoroethyl group and trifluoromethyl group.

・“Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group”
Specific examples of the "substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group" (specific example group G4) described in this specification include the following unsubstituted alkenyl groups (specific example group G4A) and substituted alkenyl groups (specific example group G4B), etc. (Here, the term "unsubstituted alkenyl group" refers to the case where "substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group" is "unsubstituted alkenyl group", and "substituted alkenyl group" refers to "substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group"). " refers to the case where it is a "substituted alkenyl group.") In the present specification, simply "alkenyl group" includes both "unsubstituted alkenyl group" and "substituted alkenyl group."
"Substituted alkenyl group" means a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms in "unsubstituted alkenyl group" are replaced with a substituent. Specific examples of the "substituted alkenyl group" include the following "unsubstituted alkenyl group" (specific example group G4A) having a substituent, and the substituted alkenyl group (specific example group G4B). It will be done. The examples of "unsubstituted alkenyl group" and "substituted alkenyl group" listed here are just examples, and the "substituted alkenyl group" described in this specification includes specific example group G4B. A group in which the hydrogen atom of the alkenyl group itself in the "substituted alkenyl group" is further replaced with a substituent, and a group in which the hydrogen atom of the substituent in the "substituted alkenyl group" in Example Group G4B is further replaced with a substituent. included.

・Unsubstituted alkenyl group (specific example group G4A):
vinyl group,
allyl group,
1-butenyl group,
2-butenyl group and 3-butenyl group.

・Substituted alkenyl group (specific example group G4B):
1,3-butandienyl group,
1-methylvinyl group,
1-methylallyl group,
1,1-dimethylallyl group,
2-methylallyl group and 1,2-dimethylallyl group.

・“Substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group”
Specific examples of the "substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group" (specific example group G5) described in this specification include the following unsubstituted alkynyl group (specific example group G5A). (Here, the term "unsubstituted alkynyl group" refers to the case where "substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group" is "unsubstituted alkynyl group.") Hereinafter, when simply "alkynyl group" is used, "unsubstituted alkynyl group" is referred to as "unsubstituted alkynyl group." ``alkynyl group'' and ``substituted alkynyl group.''
"Substituted alkynyl group" means a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms in "unsubstituted alkynyl group" are replaced with a substituent. Specific examples of the "substituted alkynyl group" include groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms in the following "unsubstituted alkynyl group" (specific example group G5A) are replaced with a substituent.

・Unsubstituted alkynyl group (specific example group G5A):
ethynyl group

・“Substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group”
Specific examples (specific example group G6) of the "substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" described in this specification include the following unsubstituted cycloalkyl groups (specific example group G6A) and substituted cycloalkyl groups ( Examples include specific example group G6B). (Here, the term "unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" refers to the case where "substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" is "unsubstituted cycloalkyl group", and the term "substituted cycloalkyl group" refers to "substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group"). ("cycloalkyl group" refers to the case where "substituted cycloalkyl group" is used.) In this specification, when simply referring to "cycloalkyl group", it refers to "unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" and "substituted cycloalkyl group". including both.
"Substituted cycloalkyl group" means a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms in "unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" are replaced with a substituent. Specific examples of the "substituted cycloalkyl group" include the following "unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" (specific example group G6A) in which one or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a substituent, and a substituted cycloalkyl group. (Specific example group G6B) and the like can be mentioned. The examples of "unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" and "substituted cycloalkyl group" listed here are just examples, and the "substituted cycloalkyl group" described in this specification includes specific A group in which one or more hydrogen atoms bonded to the carbon atom of the cycloalkyl group itself is replaced with a substituent in the "substituted cycloalkyl group" of example group G6B, and in the "substituted cycloalkyl group" of specific example group G6B Also included are groups in which the hydrogen atom of a substituent is further replaced with a substituent.

・Unsubstituted cycloalkyl group (specific example group G6A):
cyclopropyl group,
cyclobutyl group,
cyclopentyl group,
cyclohexyl group,
1-adamantyl group,
2-adamantyl group,
1-norbornyl group and 2-norbornyl group.

・Substituted cycloalkyl group (specific example group G6B):
4-methylcyclohexyl group.

・"Group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ )"
Specific examples of the group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ) described in this specification (specific example group G7) include:
-Si(G1)(G1)(G1),
-Si(G1)(G2)(G2),
-Si(G1)(G1)(G2),
-Si(G2)(G2)(G2),
-Si(G3)(G3)(G3), and -Si(G6)(G6)(G6)
can be mentioned. here,
G1 is a "substituted or unsubstituted aryl group" described in specific example group G1.
G2 is a "substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group" described in specific example group G2.
G3 is a "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" described in specific example group G3.
G6 is a "substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" described in specific example group G6.
-Si(G1) (G1) A plurality of G1's in (G1) are the same or different from each other.
- A plurality of G2's in Si(G1)(G2)(G2) are mutually the same or different.
- A plurality of G1's in Si(G1) (G1) (G2) are mutually the same or different.
- A plurality of G2's in Si(G2) (G2) (G2) are mutually the same or different.
- A plurality of G3's in Si(G3) (G3) (G3) are mutually the same or different.
- A plurality of G6's in Si(G6) (G6) (G6) are mutually the same or different.

・"Group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ )"
Specific examples of the group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ) described in this specification (specific example group G8) include:
-O(G1),
-O(G2),
-O (G3) and -O (G6)
can be mentioned.
here,
G1 is a "substituted or unsubstituted aryl group" described in specific example group G1.
G2 is a "substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group" described in specific example group G2.
G3 is a "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" described in specific example group G3.
G6 is a "substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" described in specific example group G6.

・"Group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ )"
Specific examples of the group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ) described in this specification (specific example group G9) include:
-S (G1),
-S (G2),
-S (G3) and -S (G6)
can be mentioned.
here,
G1 is a "substituted or unsubstituted aryl group" described in specific example group G1.
G2 is a "substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group" described in specific example group G2.
G3 is a "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" described in specific example group G3.
G6 is a "substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" described in specific example group G6.

・"Group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ )"
Specific examples of the group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ) described in this specification (specific example group G10) include:
-N(G1)(G1),
-N(G2)(G2),
-N (G1) (G2),
-N (G3) (G3), and -N (G6) (G6)
can be mentioned.
here,
G1 is a "substituted or unsubstituted aryl group" described in specific example group G1.
G2 is a "substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group" described in specific example group G2.
G3 is a "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" described in specific example group G3.
G6 is a "substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" described in specific example group G6.
-N(G1) A plurality of G1's in (G1) are mutually the same or different.
-N(G2) A plurality of G2's in (G2) are the same or different.
-N(G3) A plurality of G3's in (G3) are mutually the same or different.
-N(G6) Multiple G6s in (G6) are the same or different from each other

・"Halogen atom"
Specific examples of the "halogen atom" (specific example group G11) described in this specification include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, and the like.

・“Substituted or unsubstituted fluoroalkyl group”
The "substituted or unsubstituted fluoroalkyl group" described in this specification refers to a "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" in which at least one hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom constituting the alkyl group is replaced with a fluorine atom. It also includes a group in which all hydrogen atoms bonded to the carbon atoms constituting the alkyl group in a "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" are replaced with fluorine atoms (perfluoro group). The number of carbon atoms in the "unsubstituted fluoroalkyl group" is from 1 to 50, preferably from 1 to 30, and more preferably from 1 to 18, unless otherwise specified herein. "Substituted fluoroalkyl group" means a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms of the "fluoroalkyl group" are replaced with a substituent. In addition, the "substituted fluoroalkyl group" described in this specification includes a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms bonded to the carbon atom of the alkyl chain in the "substituted fluoroalkyl group" is further replaced with a substituent, and Also included are groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms of a substituent in a "substituted fluoroalkyl group" are further replaced with a substituent. Specific examples of the "unsubstituted fluoroalkyl group" include a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms in the "alkyl group" (specific example group G3) are replaced with a fluorine atom.

・“Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group”
The "substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group" described herein means that at least one hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom constituting the alkyl group in the "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" is replaced with a halogen atom. It means a group, and also includes a group in which all hydrogen atoms bonded to carbon atoms constituting an alkyl group in a "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" are replaced with halogen atoms. Unless otherwise specified herein, the number of carbon atoms in the "unsubstituted haloalkyl group" is from 1 to 50, preferably from 1 to 30, and more preferably from 1 to 18. "Substituted haloalkyl group" means a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms of the "haloalkyl group" are replaced with a substituent. In addition, the "substituted haloalkyl group" described in this specification includes a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms bonded to the carbon atom of the alkyl chain in the "substituted haloalkyl group" is further replaced with a substituent; Also included are groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms of a substituent in the "haloalkyl group" are further replaced with a substituent. Specific examples of the "unsubstituted haloalkyl group" include a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms in the "alkyl group" (specific example group G3) are replaced with a halogen atom. A haloalkyl group is sometimes referred to as a halogenated alkyl group.

・“Substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group”
A specific example of the "substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group" described in this specification is a group represented by -O(G3), where G3 is a "substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group" described in specific example group G3. "unsubstituted alkyl group". The number of carbon atoms in the "unsubstituted alkoxy group" is from 1 to 50, preferably from 1 to 30, and more preferably from 1 to 18, unless otherwise specified herein.

・“Substituted or unsubstituted alkylthio group”
A specific example of the "substituted or unsubstituted alkylthio group" described in this specification is a group represented by -S(G3), where G3 is the "substituted or unsubstituted alkylthio group" described in specific example group G3. "unsubstituted alkyl group". Unless otherwise specified herein, the number of carbon atoms in the "unsubstituted alkylthio group" is from 1 to 50, preferably from 1 to 30, and more preferably from 1 to 18.

・“Substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy group”
A specific example of the "substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy group" described in this specification is a group represented by -O(G1), where G1 is a "substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy group" described in specific example group G1. or an unsubstituted aryl group. The number of ring carbon atoms in the "unsubstituted aryloxy group" is from 6 to 50, preferably from 6 to 30, and more preferably from 6 to 18, unless otherwise specified herein.

・“Substituted or unsubstituted arylthio group”
A specific example of the "substituted or unsubstituted arylthio group" described in this specification is a group represented by -S(G1), where G1 is the "substituted or unsubstituted arylthio group" described in the specific example group G1. "Unsubstituted aryl group". The number of ring carbon atoms in the "unsubstituted arylthio group" is from 6 to 50, preferably from 6 to 30, and more preferably from 6 to 18, unless otherwise specified herein.

・“Substituted or unsubstituted trialkylsilyl group”
A specific example of the "trialkylsilyl group" described in this specification is a group represented by -Si(G3)(G3)(G3), where G3 is a group described in specific example group G3. It is a "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group." - A plurality of G3's in Si(G3) (G3) (G3) are mutually the same or different. The number of carbon atoms in each alkyl group of the "trialkylsilyl group" is from 1 to 50, preferably from 1 to 20, and more preferably from 1 to 6, unless otherwise specified herein.

・“Substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group”
A specific example of the "substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group" described in this specification is a group represented by -(G3)-(G1), where G3 is a group described in specific example group G3. It is a "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group", and G1 is a "substituted or unsubstituted aryl group" described in the specific example group G1. Therefore, an "aralkyl group" is a group in which the hydrogen atom of an "alkyl group" is replaced with an "aryl group" as a substituent, and is one embodiment of a "substituted alkyl group." An "unsubstituted aralkyl group" is an "unsubstituted alkyl group" substituted with an "unsubstituted aryl group", and the number of carbon atoms in the "unsubstituted aralkyl group" is determined unless otherwise specified herein. , 7 to 50, preferably 7 to 30, more preferably 7 to 18.
Specific examples of "substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl groups" include benzyl group, 1-phenylethyl group, 2-phenylethyl group, 1-phenylisopropyl group, 2-phenylisopropyl group, phenyl-t-butyl group, α - Naphthylmethyl group, 1-α-naphthylethyl group, 2-α-naphthylethyl group, 1-α-naphthylisopropyl group, 2-α-naphthylisopropyl group, β-naphthylmethyl group, 1-β-naphthylethyl group , 2-β-naphthylethyl group, 1-β-naphthylisopropyl group, and 2-β-naphthylisopropyl group.

The substituted or unsubstituted aryl group described herein is preferably a phenyl group, p-biphenyl group, m-biphenyl group, o-biphenyl group, p-terphenyl group, unless otherwise specified herein. 4-yl group, p-terphenyl-3-yl group, p-terphenyl-2-yl group, m-terphenyl-4-yl group, m-terphenyl-3-yl group, m-terphenyl- 2-yl group, o-terphenyl-4-yl group, o-terphenyl-3-yl group, o-terphenyl-2-yl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, anthryl group, phenanthryl group , pyrenyl group, chrysenyl group, triphenylenyl group, fluorenyl group, 9,9'-spirobifluorenyl group, 9,9-dimethylfluorenyl group, and 9,9-diphenylfluorenyl group.

The substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group described herein is preferably a pyridyl group, a pyrimidinyl group, a triazinyl group, a quinolyl group, an isoquinolyl group, a quinazolinyl group, a benzimidazolyl group, or a phenol group, unless otherwise specified herein. Nanthrolinyl group, carbazolyl group (1-carbazolyl group, 2-carbazolyl group, 3-carbazolyl group, 4-carbazolyl group, or 9-carbazolyl group), benzocarbazolyl group, azacarbazolyl group, diazacarbazolyl group , dibenzofuranyl group, naphthobenzofuranyl group, azadibenzofuranyl group, diazadibenzofuranyl group, dibenzothiophenyl group, naphthobenzothiophenyl group, azadibenzothiophenyl group, diazadibenzothiophenyl group, ( 9-phenyl)carbazolyl group ((9-phenyl)carbazol-1-yl group, (9-phenyl)carbazol-2-yl group, (9-phenyl)carbazol-3-yl group, or (9-phenyl)carbazole -4-yl group), (9-biphenylyl)carbazolyl group, (9-phenyl)phenylcarbazolyl group, diphenylcarbazol-9-yl group, phenylcarbazol-9-yl group, phenyltriazinyl group, biphenylyl group These include riazinyl group, diphenyltriazinyl group, phenyldibenzofuranyl group, and phenyldibenzothiophenyl group.

In this specification, the carbazolyl group is specifically any of the following groups unless otherwise specified in this specification.

In this specification, the (9-phenyl)carbazolyl group is specifically any of the following groups, unless otherwise specified in the specification.

In the general formulas (TEMP-Cz1) to (TEMP-Cz9), * represents the bonding position.

In this specification, the dibenzofuranyl group and dibenzothiophenyl group are specifically any of the following groups, unless otherwise specified in the specification.

In the general formulas (TEMP-34) to (TEMP-41), * represents the bonding position.

Unless otherwise specified herein, the substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group described herein is preferably a methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group, isobutyl group, and t- Butyl group, etc.

・“Substituted or unsubstituted arylene group”
Unless otherwise specified, the "substituted or unsubstituted arylene group" described in this specification refers to 2 derived from the above "substituted or unsubstituted aryl group" by removing one hydrogen atom on the aryl ring. It is the basis of valence. As a specific example of the "substituted or unsubstituted arylene group" (specific example group G12), by removing one hydrogen atom on the aryl ring from the "substituted or unsubstituted aryl group" described in specific example group G1, Examples include divalent groups derived from the derivatives.

・“Substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group”
Unless otherwise specified, the "substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group" described herein refers to the "substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group" described above, in which one hydrogen atom on the heterocycle is removed. It is a divalent group derived from Specific examples of the "substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group" (specific example group G13) include one hydrogen on the heterocycle from the "substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group" described in specific example group G2. Examples include divalent groups derived by removing atoms.

・“Substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group”
Unless otherwise specified, the "substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group" described in this specification refers to 2 derived from the above "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" by removing one hydrogen atom on the alkyl chain. It is the basis of valence. As a specific example of a "substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group" (specific example group G14), one hydrogen atom on the alkyl chain is removed from the "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" described in specific example group G3. Examples include divalent groups derived from the derivatives.

The substituted or unsubstituted arylene group described herein is preferably a group represented by any of the following general formulas (TEMP-42) to (TEMP-68), unless otherwise specified herein.

In the general formulas (TEMP-42) to (TEMP-52), Q ₁ to Q ₁₀ are each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
In the general formulas (TEMP-42) to (TEMP-52), * represents the bonding position.

In the general formulas (TEMP-53) to (TEMP-62), Q ₁ to Q ₁₀ are each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
Formulas Q ₉ and Q ₁₀ may be bonded to each other via a single bond to form a ring.
In the general formulas (TEMP-53) to (TEMP-62), * represents the bonding position.

In the general formulas (TEMP-63) to (TEMP-68), Q ₁ to Q ₈ are each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
In the general formulas (TEMP-63) to (TEMP-68), * represents the bonding position.

The substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group described herein is preferably one of the following general formulas (TEMP-69) to (TEMP-102), unless otherwise specified herein. It is.

In the general formulas (TEMP-69) to (TEMP-82), Q ₁ to Q ₉ are each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituent.

In the general formulas (TEMP-83) to (TEMP-102), Q ₁ to Q ₈ are each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituent.

The above is the explanation about the "substituents described in this specification".

・"When combining to form a ring"
In the present specification, "one or more pairs of two or more adjacent groups are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle, or bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring." or do not bond to each other'' means ``one or more pairs of two or more adjacent groups bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle''; One or more pairs of two or more adjacent groups bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, and one or more pairs of two or more adjacent groups do not bond to each other. ” means if and.
In this specification, when "one or more sets of two or more adjacent rings are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle" and "one or more sets of two or more adjacent rings are combined with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle" Regarding the case where "a pair or more are combined with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring" (hereinafter, these cases may be collectively referred to as "a case where they are combined to form a ring"), the following ,explain. The case of an anthracene compound represented by the following general formula (TEMP-103) whose parent skeleton is an anthracene ring will be explained as an example.

For example, in the case where "one or more of the sets of two or more adjacent R ₉₂₁ to R 930 combine with each other to form a ring," the set of two or more adjacent R 921 to R ₉₃₀ is one set. is a set of R ₉₂₁ and R ₉₂₂ , a set of R ₉₂₂ and R ₉₂₃ , a set of R ₉₂₃ and R ₉₂₄ , a set of R ₉₂₄ and R ₉₃₀ , a set of R ₉₃₀ and R ₉₂₅ , a set of R ₉₂₅ and A set of R ₉₂₆ , a set of R ₉₂₆ and R ₉₂₇ , a set of R ₉₂₇ and R ₉₂₈ , a set of R ₉₂₈ and R ₉₂₉ , and a set of R ₉₂₉ and R ₉₂₁ .

The above-mentioned "one or more sets" means that two or more sets of the above-mentioned two or more adjacent sets may form a ring at the same time. For example, when R ₉₂₁ and R ₉₂₂ combine with each other to form ring Q _A , and at the same time R ₉₂₅ and R ₉₂₆ combine with each other to form ring Q _B , the above general formula (TEMP-103) The anthracene compound represented is represented by the following general formula (TEMP-104).

The case where "a set of two or more adjacent items" forms a ring is not only the case where a set of "two" adjacent items are combined as in the above example, but also the case where a pair of "three or more adjacent items" form a ring. This also includes the case where two sets are combined. For example, R ₉₂₁ and R ₉₂₂ combine with each other to form a ring Q _A , R ₉₂₂ and R ₉₂₃ combine with each other to form a ring Q _C , and three adjacent to each other (R ₉₂₁ , R ₉₂₂ and R ₉₂₃ ) combine with each other to form a ring and are condensed to the anthracene mother skeleton. In this case, the anthracene compound represented by the general formula (TEMP-103) is as follows: It is represented by the general formula (TEMP-105). In the following general formula (TEMP-105), ring Q _A and ring Q _C share R ₉₂₂ .

The "single ring" or "fused ring" that is formed may be a saturated ring or an unsaturated ring as a structure consisting only of the formed ring. Even if “one set of two adjacent rings” forms a “monocycle” or “fused ring”, the “single ring” or “fused ring” is a saturated ring, or Can form unsaturated rings. For example, ring Q _A and ring Q _B formed in the general formula (TEMP-104) are each a "monocyclic ring" or a "fused ring." Furthermore, the ring Q _A and the ring Q _C formed in the general formula (TEMP-105) are "fused rings". Ring Q _A and ring Q _C in the general formula (TEMP-105) are a fused ring by condensation of ring Q _A and ring Q _C. When ring Q _A in the general formula (TMEP-104) is a benzene ring, ring Q _A is a monocyclic ring. When ring Q _A in the general formula (TMEP-104) is a naphthalene ring, ring Q _A is a fused ring.

"Unsaturated ring" means an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or an aromatic heterocycle. "Saturated ring" means an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring or a non-aromatic heterocycle.
Specific examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring include structures in which the groups listed as specific examples in specific example group G1 are terminated with hydrogen atoms.
Specific examples of the aromatic heterocycle include structures in which the aromatic heterocyclic group listed as a specific example in specific example group G2 is terminated with a hydrogen atom.
Specific examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring include structures in which the groups listed as specific examples in specific example group G6 are terminated with hydrogen atoms.
"Form a ring" means to form a ring with only a plurality of atoms of a parent skeleton, or with a plurality of atoms of a parent skeleton and one or more arbitrary elements. For example, the ring Q _A shown in the general formula (TEMP-104) formed by R ₉₂₁ and R ₉₂₂ bonding to each other is a carbon atom of the anthracene skeleton to which R ₉₂₁ is bonded, and an anthracene bond to which R ₉₂₂ is bonded. It means a ring formed by a carbon atom in the skeleton and one or more arbitrary elements. As a specific example, when R ₉₂₁ and R ₉₂₂ form a ring Q _A , the carbon atom of the anthracene skeleton to which R ₉₂₁ is bonded, the carbon atom of the anthracene skeleton to which R ₉₂₂ is bonded, and four carbon atoms. When R 921 and R 922 form a monocyclic unsaturated ring, the ring formed by R ₉₂₁ and R ₉₂₂ is a benzene ring.

Here, the "arbitrary element" is preferably at least one element selected from the group consisting of carbon element, nitrogen element, oxygen element, and sulfur element, unless otherwise specified in this specification. In any element (for example, in the case of a carbon element or a nitrogen element), a bond that does not form a ring may be terminated with a hydrogen atom or the like, or may be substituted with an "arbitrary substituent" described below. When any element other than carbon is included, the ring formed is a heterocycle.
Unless otherwise specified herein, the number of "one or more arbitrary elements" constituting a monocyclic or condensed ring is preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 3 to 12. , more preferably 3 or more and 5 or less.
Unless otherwise specified herein, "monocycle" is preferred among "monocycle" and "fused ring."
Unless otherwise specified herein, the "unsaturated ring" is preferred between the "saturated ring" and the "unsaturated ring".
Unless otherwise stated herein, a "monocycle" is preferably a benzene ring.
Unless otherwise stated herein, an "unsaturated ring" is preferably a benzene ring.
When "one or more pairs of two or more adjacent groups" are "bonded with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle" or "bonded with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring" In the case of "forming", unless otherwise specified herein, preferably, one or more of the pairs of two or more adjacent atoms are bonded to each other to form a bond with a plurality of atoms of the parent skeleton and one or more of the 15 or more atoms. A substituted or unsubstituted "unsaturated ring" is formed with at least one element selected from the group consisting of the following carbon elements, nitrogen elements, oxygen elements, and sulfur elements.

When the above-mentioned "single ring" or "fused ring" has a substituent, the substituent is, for example, the "arbitrary substituent" described below. Specific examples of the substituent in the case where the above-mentioned "single ring" or "fused ring" has a substituent are the substituents described in the section of "Substituent described herein" above.
When the above-mentioned "saturated ring" or "unsaturated ring" has a substituent, the substituent is, for example, the "arbitrary substituent" described below. Specific examples of the substituent in the case where the above-mentioned "single ring" or "fused ring" has a substituent are the substituents described in the section of "Substituent described herein" above.
The above applies to cases in which "one or more sets of two or more adjacent rings combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle," and "one or more sets of two or more adjacent rings." are combined with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring ("the case where they are combined to form a ring").

・Substituent in the case of "substituted or unsubstituted" In one embodiment in this specification, the substituent in the case of "substituted or unsubstituted" (herein referred to as "arbitrary substituent") For example,
unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
-Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
-O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
-S- (R ₉₀₅ ),
-N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
Halogen atom, cyano group, nitro group,
A group selected from the group consisting of an unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, and an unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
Here, R ₉₀₁ to R ₉₀₇ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.
When two or more R _901s exist, the two or more R _901s are the same or different,
When two or more R _902s exist, the two or more R _902s are the same or different,
When two or more R _903s exist, the two or more R _903s are the same or different,
When two or more R _904s exist, the two or more R _904s are the same or different,
When two or more R _905s exist, the two or more R _905s are the same or different,
When two or more R _906s exist, the two or more R _906s are the same or different,
When two or more R _907s exist, the two or more R _907s are the same or different.

In one embodiment, the substituent in the case of "substituted or unsubstituted" is
an alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
A group selected from the group consisting of an aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms and a heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In one embodiment, the substituent in the case of "substituted or unsubstituted" is
an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms,
A group selected from the group consisting of an aryl group having 6 to 18 ring carbon atoms and a heterocyclic group having 5 to 18 ring atoms.

Specific examples of each group of the above-mentioned arbitrary substituents are the specific examples of the substituents described in the section of "Substituents described in this specification" above.

Unless otherwise specified in this specification, any adjacent substituents may form a "saturated ring" or "unsaturated ring", preferably a substituted or unsubstituted saturated ring. Forms a membered ring, a substituted or unsubstituted saturated 6-membered ring, a substituted or unsubstituted unsaturated 5-membered ring, or a substituted or unsubstituted unsaturated 6-membered ring, more preferably a benzene ring do.
Unless otherwise specified herein, any substituent may further have a substituent. The substituents that the arbitrary substituents further have are the same as the above arbitrary substituents.

In this specification, the numerical range expressed using "AA-BB" has the numerical value AA written before "AA-BB" as the lower limit, and the numerical value BB written after "AA-BB". means a range that includes as an upper limit value.

[First embodiment]
(Organic electroluminescent device)
The organic electroluminescent device according to the first embodiment includes a first light-emitting layer and a second light-emitting layer, the first light-emitting layer containing a first host material, and the second light-emitting layer comprising: The first light emitting layer includes a second host material, the first host material and the second host material are different from each other, and the first light emitting layer has a first light emitting property that emits light with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less. The second light-emitting layer contains at least a second light-emitting compound that emits light with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less, and the second light-emitting layer is a film of the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer. The total thickness is 20 nm or less, the first luminescent compound and the second luminescent compound are the same or different from each other, and the triplet energy T ₁ (H1 ) and the triplet energy T ₁ (H2) of the second host material satisfy the relationship of the following formula (Equation 1).
T ₁ (H1)>T ₁ (H2)...(Math. 1)

We provide at least two emissive layers (i.e. a first emissive layer and a second emissive layer), the triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material in the first emissive layer. and the triplet energy T ₁ (H2) of the second host material in the second light-emitting layer satisfy the relationship of the above formula (Equation 1), and furthermore, the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer It has been found that the luminous efficiency can be improved by reducing the total film thickness to 20 nm or less. The reason for this is thought to be as follows.

First, Triplet-Tripret-Annhilation (sometimes referred to as TTA), which is known as a technique for improving the luminous efficiency of organic EL elements, will be explained.
TTA is a mechanism in which triplet excitons collide with triplet excitons to generate singlet excitons. Note that the TTA mechanism is sometimes referred to as a TTF mechanism as described in Patent Document 4.
The TTF phenomenon will be explained. Holes injected from the anode and electrons injected from the cathode recombine within the light emitting layer to generate excitons. As is conventionally known, the spin state has a ratio of 25% singlet excitons and 75% triplet excitons. In conventionally known fluorescent devices, 25% of singlet excitons emit light when they relax to the ground state, but the remaining 75% of triplet excitons are thermally deactivated without emitting light. The process returns to the ground state. Therefore, the theoretical limit value of the internal quantum efficiency of conventional fluorescent elements was said to be 25%.
On the other hand, the behavior of triplet excitons generated inside organic materials has been investigated theoretically. S. M. According to Bachilo et al. (J. Phys. Chem. A, 104, 7711 (2000)), assuming that a higher-order exciton such as a quintet immediately returns to a triplet, the When the density of ^{3A *} ) increases, triplet excitons collide with each other and a reaction as shown in the following formula occurs. Here, ¹ A represents the ground state and ¹ A ^* represents the lowest excited singlet exciton.
³ A ^* + ³ A ^* → (4/9) ¹ A + (1/9) ¹ A ^* + (13/9) ³ A ^*
That is, 5 ³ A ^* → 4 ¹ A + 1 A ^* , and it is predicted that of the 75% of triplet excitons originally generated, 1/5, or 20%, will change to singlet excitons. Therefore, the number of singlet excitons contributing as light is 40%, which is the 25% originally generated plus 75%×(1/5)=15%. At this time, the emission ratio derived from TTF (TTF ratio) in the total emission intensity is 15/40, that is, 37.5%. Furthermore, if 75% of the initially generated triplet excitons collide with each other to generate a singlet exciton (one singlet exciton is generated from two triplet excitons), then the initially generated singlet exciton An extremely high internal quantum efficiency of 62.5%, which is the sum of 75% x (1/2) = 37.5% to the 25% exciton term, can be obtained. At this time, the TTF ratio is 37.5/62.5=60%.

Next, in the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, the triplet energy T 1 (H1) of the first host material in the first light-emitting layer and the triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the second host material in the second light-emitting layer are The significance of the term energy T ₁ (H2) satisfying the relationship of the above formula (Equation 1) will be explained.
In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, by satisfying the relationship of the above formula (Equation 1), the triplet excitons generated by recombination of holes and electrons in the first light emitting layer are Even if carriers are present in excess at the interface between the first light-emitting layer and the organic layer that is in direct contact with the first light-emitting layer, it is thought that the triplet excitons present at the interface between the first light-emitting layer and the organic layer are difficult to quench. For example, if a recombination region exists locally at the interface between the first light emitting layer and the hole transport layer or electron barrier layer, quenching due to excessive electrons is possible. On the other hand, when a recombination region exists locally at the interface between the first light emitting layer and the electron transport layer or hole blocking layer, quenching due to excessive holes is considered.
The organic EL device according to the present embodiment includes a first light-emitting layer and a second light-emitting layer so as to satisfy the relationship of the above formula (Equation 1), so that triplet excitons generated in the first light-emitting layer can move to the second light-emitting layer without being quenched by excess carriers, and can also suppress the reverse movement from the second light-emitting layer to the first light-emitting layer. As a result, in the second light-emitting layer, the TTF mechanism is developed, singlet excitons are efficiently generated, and the light-emitting efficiency is improved.
In this way, an organic EL element has a first light-emitting layer that mainly generates triplet excitons, and a second light-emitting layer that mainly produces a TTF mechanism by utilizing triplet excitons that have migrated from the first light-emitting layer. and a second light emitting layer as different regions, using a compound having a triplet energy smaller than that of the first host material in the first light emitting layer as the second host material in the second light emitting layer. , by providing a difference in triplet energy, the luminous efficiency is improved compared to the case where the relationship of the above formula (Equation 1) is not satisfied.

Next, the significance of reducing the total thickness of the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer to 20 nm or less in the organic EL device according to this embodiment will be explained.
As described above, the organic EL device of this embodiment has a light emitting layer having a laminated structure, and further uses a first host material and a second host material that satisfy the relationship of the above formula (Equation 1) to emit light. We are trying to improve efficiency.
In an organic EL device whose light emitting layer has a laminated structure, the single light emitting region and the TTF-derived light emitting region are functionally separated, and the separation of the light emitting region into two expands the light emitting distribution and reduces light extraction. Efficiency may decrease.
Therefore, in the organic EL device of this embodiment, by thinning the light emitting layers (the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer), the single light emitting region and the TTF light emitting region, which were spread over the two light emitting layers, can be separated. be close to each other. As a result, it is considered that interference can be used more effectively and the efficiency of light extraction to the outside is improved, leading to an improvement in luminous efficiency.
From the above, according to the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, the triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material in the first light emitting layer and the second host material in the second light emitting layer The triplet energy T ₁ (H2) of the light emitting layer satisfies the relationship of the above formula (Equation 1) and the total thickness of the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer is 20 nm or less. Even if the film is made thinner, the luminous efficiency can be improved. Further, according to the organic EL element according to this embodiment, the driving voltage can also be reduced by making the light emitting layer thinner.

The organic EL element according to the first embodiment may be of a bottom emission type or a top emission type, but is preferably a top emission type from the viewpoint of further improving luminous efficiency.
That is, the organic EL element according to the first embodiment is preferably an organic EL element in which the anode is a reflective electrode and light is extracted from the cathode side.
Note that the anode may be a transparent electrode. In the case of this embodiment, it is preferable that a light-reflecting layer is disposed on the opposite side of the anode from the light-emitting layer. In the case of FIG. 1, which will be described later, the light reflecting layer may be placed on the opposite side of the substrate to the anode.

FIG. 1 shows a schematic configuration of an example of an organic EL element according to the first embodiment. The organic EL device shown in FIG. 1 is a top emission type organic EL device.
The organic EL element 1 includes a transparent substrate 2, an anode 3, a cathode 4, and an organic layer 10 disposed between the anode 3 and the cathode 4. The organic layer 10 includes, in order from the anode 3 side, a hole injection layer 6, a hole transport layer 7, a first light emitting layer 51, a second light emitting layer 52, an electron transport layer 8, and an electron injection layer 9. It is constructed by stacking layers in order. In the case of FIG. 1, the anode 3 is a reflective electrode. The anode 3 is composed of a reflective layer 31 and a conductive layer 32.
The organic EL element 1 includes a first light-emitting layer 51 and a second light-emitting layer 52 containing a host material that satisfies the relationship of the above-mentioned formula (Equation 1).
Further, in the organic EL element 1, the sum of the film thickness d1 (unit: nm) of the first light emitting layer 51 and the film thickness d2 (unit: nm) of the second light emitting layer 52 is 20 nm or less. That is, the total thickness (d1+d2) of the first light-emitting layer 51 and the second light-emitting layer 52 satisfies the following formula (100).
d1+d2≦20nm...(several 100)

The organic EL element 1 according to the first embodiment is not limited to the configuration of the organic EL element 1 shown in FIG. 1. As an organic EL element having another structure, for example, the organic layer may include, in order from the anode side, a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, a second light emitting layer, a first light emitting layer, an electron transport layer, and an electron injection layer. An example is an embodiment in which the layers are laminated in this order. Further, as an organic EL element having another configuration, for example, an embodiment in which the cathode is a reflective electrode can be mentioned.

A preferred aspect of the organic EL element 1 according to the first embodiment will be described.

In the organic EL device 1 according to the first embodiment, the total thickness of the first light emitting layer 51 and the second light emitting layer 52 is preferably 17 nm or less.
In the organic EL device 1 according to the first embodiment, it is more preferable that the total thickness of the first light emitting layer 51 and the second light emitting layer 52 is 15 nm or less.
That is, the total thickness (d1+d2) of the first light-emitting layer 51 and the second light-emitting layer 52 preferably satisfies the following formula (101), and more preferably satisfies the following formula (102). preferable. Note that the lower limit of the total thickness (d1+d2) of the first light emitting layer 51 and the second light emitting layer 52 is preferably 6 nm or more.
d1+d2≦17nm...(Math. 101)
d1+d2≦15nm...(Math. 102)

In the organic EL device 1 according to the first embodiment, the thickness d1 of the first light emitting layer 51 is preferably thinner than the thickness d2 of the second light emitting layer 52.

In the organic EL device 1 according to the first embodiment, when the film thickness d1 of the first light emitting layer 51 is thinner than the film thickness d2 of the second light emitting layer 52, the triplet generated in the first light emitting layer 51 The excitons do not remain in the first light emitting layer 51, but can be efficiently diffused into the second light emitting layer 52. Therefore, the film thickness d1 of the first light emitting layer 51 is preferably made thinner than the film thickness d2 of the second light emitting layer 52. Although the film thickness d1 of the first light emitting layer 51 is not particularly limited based on the above reason, it is preferably, for example, 3 nm or more and 10 nm or less, and more preferably 5 nm or more and 8 nm or less.

In the organic EL device 1 according to the first embodiment, the film thickness d2 of the second light-emitting layer 52 is divided into a single light-emitting region mainly generated in the first light-emitting layer and a triplet light-emitting region mainly occurring in the second light-emitting layer. In order to bring them close to each other, the thickness is preferably 3 nm or more and 15 nm or less, and more preferably 5 nm or more and 15 nm or less.
Further, the film thickness d2 of the second light emitting layer 52 is set in order to efficiently diffuse triplet excitons generated in the first light emitting layer 51 from the first light emitting layer 51 to the second light emitting layer 52. is preferably thicker than the film thickness d1 of the first light emitting layer 51.

The thickness d1 of the first light emitting layer 51 is measured as follows.
The center portion (indicated by CL in FIG. 1) of the organic EL element 1 is cut in the direction perpendicular to the surface on which the first light emitting layer 51 is formed (that is, in the film thickness d1 direction of the first light emitting layer 51), and the The cut surface at the center is observed and measured using a transmission electron microscope (TEM).
Note that the center of the organic EL element 1 means the center of the shape of the organic EL element 1 projected from the cathode 4 side, and for example, when the projected shape is a rectangle, it means the intersection of diagonals of the rectangle. .
The film thickness d2 of the second light emitting layer 52 is also measured in the same manner.
In addition, "the distance D2 between the cathode 4 and the second light-emitting layer 52" and "the total thickness D1 of the first light-emitting layer 51 and the second light-emitting layer 52", which will be described later, are also measured in the same manner. do.

[Second embodiment]
(Organic electroluminescent device)
The organic electroluminescent device according to the second embodiment includes a first light-emitting layer and a second light-emitting layer, the first light-emitting layer containing a first host material, and the second light-emitting layer comprising: The first light emitting layer includes a second host material, the first host material and the second host material are different from each other, and the first light emitting layer has a first light emitting property that emits light with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less. The second light-emitting layer contains at least a second light-emitting compound that emits light with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less, and the distance between the cathode and the second light-emitting layer is Ratio of the total film thicknesses of the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer (total thickness of the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer/the cathode and the second light-emitting layer) the distance between the layers) is 0.8 or less, the first luminescent compound and the second luminescent compound are the same or different from each other, and the triple layer of the first host material The term energy T ₁ (H1) and the triplet energy T ₁ (H2) of the second host material satisfy the relationship of the following formula (Equation 1).
T ₁ (H1)>T ₁ (H2)...(Math. 1)

We provide at least two emissive layers (i.e., a first emissive layer and a second emissive layer), and the triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material in the first emissive layer. and the triplet energy T ₁ (H2) of the second host material in the second light-emitting layer satisfy the relationship of the above formula (Equation 1), and the ratio (the first light-emitting layer and the first light-emitting layer and the third It has been found that the luminous efficiency can be improved by setting the sum of the film thicknesses of the second luminescent layer/distance between the cathode and the second luminescent layer to 0.8 or less.
Here, the ratio (total film thickness of the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer/distance between the cathode and the second light-emitting layer) is 0.8 or less. , means that the ratio of the total thickness of the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer to the distance between the cathode and the second light emitting layer is small. In other words, the ratio of 0.8 or less means that the light-emitting layers (the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer) are thinner than the thickness of the electron transport zone.
Therefore, according to the organic EL device according to the second embodiment, the luminous efficiency can be improved even if the ratio is set to 0.8 or less for the same reason as the first embodiment. Further, according to the organic EL element according to the second embodiment, the driving voltage can also be reduced.

The organic EL element according to the second embodiment may be a bottom emission type or a top emission type, but is preferably a top emission type from the viewpoint of further improving luminous efficiency.
That is, the organic EL element according to the second embodiment is preferably an organic EL element in which the anode is a reflective electrode and light is extracted from the cathode side.

FIG. 2 shows a schematic configuration of an example of an organic EL element according to the second embodiment. The organic EL device shown in FIG. 2 is a top emission type organic EL device.
The organic EL element 1A includes a transparent substrate 2, an anode 3, a cathode 4, and an organic layer 10 disposed between the anode 3 and the cathode 4. The organic layer 10 includes, in order from the anode 3 side, a hole injection layer 6, a hole transport layer 7, a first light emitting layer 51, a second light emitting layer 52, an electron transport layer 8, and an electron injection layer 9. It is constructed by stacking layers in order. Anode 3 is a reflective electrode. In the case of FIG. 2, the anode 3 is composed of a reflective layer 31 and a conductive layer 32.
The organic EL element 1A includes a first light-emitting layer 51 and a second light-emitting layer 52 containing a host material that satisfies the relationship of the above-mentioned formula (Equation 1).
In addition, the organic EL element 1A has a total thickness D2 of the first light emitting layer 51 and the second light emitting layer 52 with respect to the distance D1 (unit: nm) between the cathode 4 and the second light emitting layer 52. (unit: nm) (total film thickness D2 of the first light-emitting layer 51 and second light-emitting layer 52/distance D1 between the cathode 4 and the second light-emitting layer 52) (hereinafter, the ratio ( D2/D1)) is 0.8 or less. That is, the ratio (D2/D1) satisfies the following formula (Equation 200).
In addition, in the case of FIG. 2, the distance D1 between the cathode 4 and the second light emitting layer 52 is synonymous with the total thickness of the electron transport layer 8 and the electron injection layer 9.
D2/D1≦0.8...(Number 200)

The organic EL element 1A according to the second embodiment is not limited to the configuration of the organic EL element 1A shown in FIG. 2. As an organic EL element having another structure, for example, the organic layer may include, in order from the anode side, a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, a second light emitting layer, a first light emitting layer, an electron transport layer, and an electron injection layer. An example is an embodiment in which the layers are laminated in this order. Further, as an organic EL element having another configuration, for example, an embodiment in which the cathode is a reflective electrode can be mentioned.

A preferred aspect of the organic EL element 1A according to the second embodiment will be described.

In the organic EL element 1A according to the second embodiment, the ratio (D2/D1) preferably satisfies the following formula (201), and more preferably satisfies the following formula (202). Note that the lower limit of the ratio (D2/D1) is preferably 0.2 or more.
D2/D1≦0.7...(Math. 201)
D2/D1≦0.6...(Math. 202)

In the organic EL device 1A according to the second embodiment, the distance D1 between the cathode 4 and the second light emitting layer 52 is preferably 25 nm or more and 40 nm or less, and more preferably 25 nm or more and 35 nm or less.

In the organic EL device 1A according to the second embodiment, the total thickness D2 of the first light-emitting layer 51 and the second light-emitting layer 52 is the same as that of the first light-emitting layer 51 and the first light-emitting layer 52 described in the first embodiment. The thickness is preferably in the same range as the total thickness (d1+d2) of the second light emitting layer 52. That is, the total thickness D2 of the first light emitting layer 51 and the second light emitting layer 52 is preferably 20 nm or less, more preferably 17 nm or less, and even more preferably 15 nm or less.
The thickness of the first light emitting layer 51 is preferably in the same range as the thickness d1 of the first light emitting layer 51 described in the first embodiment. That is, the film thickness of the first light emitting layer 51 is preferably 3 nm or more and 10 nm or less, and more preferably 5 nm or more and 8 nm or less.
The thickness of the second light emitting layer 52 is preferably in the same range as the thickness d2 of the second light emitting layer 52 described in the first embodiment. That is, the thickness of the second light emitting layer 52 is preferably 3 nm or more and 15 nm or less, more preferably 5 nm or more and 15 nm or less.

Next, preferred aspects common to the organic EL element 1 according to the first embodiment and the organic EL element 1A according to the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, description of symbols may be omitted.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material and the triplet energy T ₁ (H2) of the second host material are expressed by the following formula (Equation 5). It is preferable that the following relationship is satisfied.
T ₁ (H1) - T ₁ (H2)>0.03eV...(Math. 5)

In this specification, the "host material" is a material that is included in, for example, "50% by mass or more of the layer." Therefore, the first light-emitting layer contains, for example, the first host material in an amount of 50% by mass or more of the total mass of the first light-emitting layer. The second light emitting layer contains, for example, the second host material in an amount of 50% by mass or more based on the total mass of the second light emitting layer.
In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the "first luminescent compound that emits light with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less" has a singlet energy S ₁ smaller than the singlet energy S 1 of the _first host material. It is preferable that the compound has the following.
In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the "second light-emitting compound that emits light with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less" has a singlet energy _S1 smaller than the singlet energy S1 of the _second host material. It is preferable that the compound has the following.

(Emission wavelength of organic EL element)
The organic EL device according to the embodiment preferably emits light having a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less when the device is driven.
It is more preferable that the organic EL device according to the embodiment emits light having a maximum peak wavelength of 430 nm or more and 480 nm or less when the device is driven.
The maximum peak wavelength of light emitted by an organic EL element when the element is driven is measured as follows. The spectral radiance spectrum is measured with a spectral radiance meter CS-2000 (manufactured by Konica Minolta) when a voltage is applied to the organic EL element so that the current density is 10 mA/cm ² . In the obtained spectral radiance spectrum, the peak wavelength of the emission spectrum at which the emission intensity becomes maximum is measured, and this is defined as the maximum peak wavelength (unit: nm).

(first light emitting layer)
The first emissive layer includes a first host material. The first host material is a different compound from the second host material contained in the second light emitting layer.
The first light-emitting layer includes at least a first light-emitting compound that emits light with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less. The first light-emitting compound contained in the first light-emitting layer is preferably a compound that emits fluorescence with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the first luminescent compound and the second luminescent compound may be different compounds or may be the same compound.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the first luminescent compound is preferably a compound that does not contain an azine ring structure in its molecule.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the first luminescent compound is preferably not a boron-containing complex, and more preferably the first luminescent compound is not a complex.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the first light emitting layer preferably does not contain a metal complex. Further, in the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the first light emitting layer preferably does not contain a boron-containing complex.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the first light emitting layer preferably does not contain a phosphorescent material.
Moreover, it is preferable that the first light emitting layer does not contain a heavy metal complex and a phosphorescent rare earth metal complex. Here, examples of heavy metal complexes include iridium complexes, osmium complexes, and platinum complexes.

The method for measuring the maximum peak wavelength of a compound is as follows. A 5 μmol/L toluene solution of the compound to be measured is prepared and placed in a quartz cell, and the emission spectrum (vertical axis: emission intensity, horizontal axis: wavelength) of this sample is measured at room temperature (300K). The emission spectrum can be measured using a spectrofluorometer (device name: F-7000) manufactured by Hitachi High-Tech Science Co., Ltd. Note that the emission spectrum measuring device is not limited to the device used here.
In the emission spectrum, the peak wavelength of the emission spectrum at which the emission intensity is maximum is defined as the maximum peak wavelength.

In the emission spectrum of the compound, the peak at which the emission intensity is maximum is defined as the maximum peak, and when the height of the maximum peak is 1, the heights of other peaks appearing in the emission spectrum are less than 0.6. It is preferable. Note that the peak in the emission spectrum is the maximum value.
Further, it is preferable that the number of peaks in the emission spectrum of the compound is less than three.

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, it is preferable that the first light emitting layer emits light having a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less when the device is driven.
The maximum peak wavelength of light emitted by the light emitting layer when driving the device can be measured by the method described below.

・Maximum peak wavelength λp of light emitted from the light emitting layer when driving the device
The maximum peak wavelength _λp1 of the light emitted from the first light-emitting layer when driving the device is determined by fabricating the organic EL device using the same material for the second light-emitting layer as the first light-emitting layer. The spectral radiance spectrum is measured with a spectral radiance meter CS-2000 (manufactured by Konica Minolta, Inc.) when a voltage is applied to the element so that the current density is 10 mA/cm ² . The maximum peak wavelength λp ₁ (unit: nm) is calculated from the obtained spectral radiance spectrum.
The maximum peak wavelength _λp2 of the light emitted from the second light emitting layer when driving the device is determined by manufacturing the organic EL device by using the same material for the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer. The spectral radiance spectrum is measured with a spectral radiance meter CS-2000 (manufactured by Konica Minolta, Inc.) when a voltage is applied to the element so that the current density is 10 mA/cm ² . The maximum peak wavelength λp ₂ (unit: nm) is calculated from the obtained spectral radiance spectrum.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the singlet energy S ₁ (H1) of the first host material and the singlet energy S ₁ (D1) of the first luminescent compound are expressed by the following formula (Equation 2 ) is preferably satisfied.
S ₁ (H1)>S ₁ (D1)...(Math. 2)
Singlet energy _S1 means the energy difference between the lowest excited singlet state and the ground state.

When the first host material and the first luminescent compound satisfy the relationship of the above formula (Equation 2), the singlet excitons generated on the first host material are Energy is easily transferred to the first luminescent compound, contributing to the luminescence (preferably fluorescent luminescence) of the first luminescent compound.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material and the triplet energy T ₁ (D1) of the first luminescent compound are expressed by the following formula (Equation 2A ) is preferably satisfied.
T ₁ (D1)>T ₁ (H1)...(Math. 2A)

Since the first host material and the first luminescent compound satisfy the relationship of the above formula (Equation 2A), the triplet excitons generated in the first luminescent layer have higher triplet energy. Since it moves not on the first luminescent compound but on the first host material, it becomes easier to migrate to the second luminescent layer.

It is preferable that the organic EL device according to the embodiment satisfies the relationship of the following mathematical formula (Equation 2B).
T ₁ (D1)>T ₁ (H1)>T ₁ (H2)...(Math. 2B)

(Triplet energy T ₁ )
Examples of the method for measuring the triplet energy _T1 include the following method.
The compound to be measured is dissolved in EPA (diethyl ether: isopentane: ethanol = 5:5:2 (volume ratio)) to a concentration of 10 ^-5 mol/L or more and 10 ^-4 mol/L or less. The solution is placed in a quartz cell and used as a measurement sample. For this measurement sample, measure the phosphorescence spectrum (vertical axis: phosphorescence intensity, horizontal axis: wavelength) at a low temperature (77 [K]), and draw a tangent to the rise of the short wavelength side of this phosphorescence spectrum. , the energy amount calculated from the following conversion formula (F1) based on the wavelength value λ _edge [nm] at the intersection of the tangent and the horizontal axis is defined as triplet energy T ₁ .
Conversion formula (F1): T ₁ [eV] = 1239.85/λ _edge

The tangent to the rise on the short wavelength side of the phosphorescence spectrum is drawn as follows. When moving on the spectrum curve from the short wavelength side of the phosphorescence spectrum to the maximum value on the shortest wavelength side among the maximum values of the spectrum, consider the tangent at each point on the curve toward the long wavelength side. This tangent line increases in slope as the curve rises (ie, as the vertical axis increases). The tangent drawn at the point where the slope value takes the maximum value (that is, the tangent at the inflection point) is the tangent to the rise of the short wavelength side of the phosphorescence spectrum.
Note that the maximum point with a peak intensity that is 15% or less of the maximum peak intensity of the spectrum is not included in the maximum value on the shortest wavelength side mentioned above, but is included in the maximum value of the slope that is closest to the maximum value on the shortest wavelength side. The tangent line drawn at the point where the value is taken is the tangent line to the rise of the short wavelength side of the phosphorescence spectrum.
For the measurement of phosphorescence, an F-4500 spectrofluorometer manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation can be used. Note that the measurement device is not limited to this, and measurement may be performed by combining a cooling device, a low-temperature container, an excitation light source, and a light receiving device.

(Singlet energy S ₁ )
Examples of the method for measuring singlet energy _S1 using a solution (sometimes referred to as a solution method) include the following method.
Prepare a toluene solution of 10 ^-5 mol/L or more and 10 ^-4 mol/L or less of the compound to be measured, put it in a quartz cell, and measure the absorption spectrum of this sample (vertical axis: absorption intensity, horizontal axis) at room temperature (300K). axis: wavelength). Draw a tangent to the fall on the long wavelength side of this absorption spectrum, and calculate the singlet energy by substituting the wavelength value λedge [nm] at the intersection of the tangent and the horizontal axis into the conversion formula (F2) shown below. do.
Conversion formula (F2): S ₁ [eV] = 1239.85/λedge
Examples of the absorption spectrum measuring device include, but are not limited to, a spectrophotometer manufactured by Hitachi (device name: U3310).

The tangent to the falling edge of the long wavelength side of the absorption spectrum is drawn as follows. When moving on a spectrum curve in the long wavelength direction from the maximum value on the longest wavelength side among the maximum values of the absorption spectrum, consider tangents at each point on the curve. The slope of this tangent line repeats decreasing and then increasing as the curve falls (that is, as the value on the vertical axis decreases). The tangent line drawn at the point where the slope value takes the minimum value on the longest wavelength side (excluding cases where the absorbance is 0.1 or less) is the tangent to the fall of the long wavelength side of the absorption spectrum.
Note that a maximum point with an absorbance value of 0.2 or less is not included in the maximum value on the longest wavelength side.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, when the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer are stacked in the order from the anode side to the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer, Electron mobility μ _E1 of the first host material, hole mobility μ _H1 of the first host material, electron mobility μ _E2 of the second host material, and hole movement of the second host material. It is preferable that the degree μ _H2 satisfies the following formula (Equation 15).
( _μE2 / _μH2 )>( _μE1 / _μH1 )…(Equation 15)

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, when the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer are stacked in the order from the anode side to the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer, It is preferable that the electron mobility μ _E1 of the first host material and the electron mobility μ _E2 of the second host material satisfy the following formula (Equation 16).
When the first host material and the second host material satisfy the relationship of the above formula (Equation 16), the recombination ability of holes and electrons in the first light emitting layer is improved.
μ _E2 > μ _E1 … (Math. 16)

Electron mobility can be measured by the following method using impedance spectroscopy.
A layer to be measured with a thickness of 100 nm to 200 nm is sandwiched between an anode and a cathode, and a minute AC voltage of 100 mV or less is applied while applying a bias DC voltage. Measure the alternating current value (absolute value and phase) flowing at this time. The main measurement is performed while changing the frequency of the AC voltage, and the complex impedance (Z) is calculated from the current value and voltage value. At this time, the frequency dependence of the imaginary part (ImM) of the modulus M = iωZ (i: imaginary unit, ω: angular frequency) is determined, and the reciprocal of the frequency ω at which ImM becomes the maximum value is determined by is defined as the response time of Then, electron mobility is calculated using the following formula.
Electron mobility = (thickness of layer to be measured) ² / (response time/voltage)

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the first luminescent compound can also be contained in the first luminescent layer. That is, the first light-emitting layer may contain the first light-emitting compound in an amount of 0.5% by mass or more, and may contain more than 1.1% by mass of the total mass of the first light-emitting layer. It can be contained in an amount of 1.2% by mass or more based on the total mass of the first light emitting layer, and can be contained in an amount of 1.5% by mass or more based on the total mass of the first light emitting layer.
The first luminescent layer preferably contains the first luminescent compound in an amount of 10% by mass or less based on the total mass of the first luminescent layer, and preferably contains a first luminescent compound in an amount of 7% by mass or less based on the total mass of the first luminescent layer. It is more preferable that the content is 5% by mass or less of the total mass of the first light-emitting layer.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the first light emitting layer preferably contains the first compound as the first host material in an amount of 60% by mass or more of the total mass of the first light emitting layer, It is more preferable that the content is 70% by mass or more of the total mass of the first light-emitting layer, and even more preferably that it is 80% or more of the total mass of the first light-emitting layer. It is even more preferable to contain 90% by mass or more of the total weight of the first light-emitting layer, and even more preferably to contain 95% by mass or more of the total mass of the first light-emitting layer.
The first light emitting layer preferably contains the first host material in an amount of 99% by mass or less of the total mass of the first light emitting layer.
However, when the first luminescent layer contains the first host material and the first luminescent compound, the upper limit of the total content of the first host material and the first luminescent compound is 100% by mass. be.

Note that the organic EL device according to the embodiment does not exclude that the first light emitting layer contains a material other than the first host material and the first light emitting compound.
The first light-emitting layer may contain only one kind of first host material, or may contain two or more kinds of first host materials. The first light-emitting layer may contain only one type of first light-emitting compound, or may contain two or more types of the first light-emitting compound.

(Second light emitting layer)
The second emissive layer includes a second host material. The second host material is a different compound from the first host material contained in the first light emitting layer.
The second light-emitting layer includes at least a second light-emitting compound that emits light with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less. The first luminescent compound and the second luminescent compound may be the same or different. The second light-emitting compound contained in the second light-emitting layer is preferably a compound that emits fluorescence with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less.
The method for measuring the maximum peak wavelength of a compound is as described above.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the second light emitting layer preferably emits light having a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less when the device is driven.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the second light-emitting compound preferably has a Stokes shift of more than 7 nm.
If the Stokes shift of the second luminescent compound exceeds 7 nm, it becomes easier to prevent a decrease in luminous efficiency due to self-absorption.
Self-absorption is a phenomenon in which the same compound absorbs emitted light, and is a phenomenon that causes a decrease in luminous efficiency. Self-absorption is significantly observed in compounds with a small Stokes shift (that is, the overlap between the absorption spectrum and the fluorescence spectrum is large). Therefore, in order to suppress self-absorption, it is necessary to It is preferable to use a compound with a small Stokes shift can be measured by the method described in Examples.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the triplet energy T ₁ (D2) of the second luminescent compound and the triplet energy T ₁ (H2) of the second host material are expressed by the following formula (Equation 3). ) is preferably satisfied.
T ₁ (D2)>T ₁ (H2)...(Math. 3)

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the second luminescent compound and the second host material satisfy the relationship of the formula (3), so that the triplet excitation generated in the first luminescent layer When the molecules migrate to the second emissive layer, they transfer energy to molecules of the second host material rather than to the second emissive compound having a higher triplet energy. Further, triplet excitons generated by recombination of holes and electrons on the second host material do not move to the second light-emitting compound having higher triplet energy. Triplet excitons generated by recombination on molecules of the second luminescent compound quickly transfer energy to molecules of the second host material.
The triplet excitons of the second host material do not move to the second luminescent compound, and the triplet excitons efficiently collide with each other on the second host material due to the TTF phenomenon, resulting in singlet excitation. A child is generated.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the singlet energy S ₁ (H2) of the second host material and the singlet energy S ₁ (D2) of the second luminescent compound are expressed by the following formula (Equation 4). ) is preferably satisfied.
S ₁ (H2)>S ₁ (D2)...(Math. 4)

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the second luminescent compound and the second host material satisfy the relationship of the formula (4), so that the singlet energy of the second luminescent compound is , is smaller than the singlet energy of the second host material, so the singlet exciton generated by the TTF phenomenon transfers energy from the second host material to the second luminescent compound, and the energy of the second luminescent compound is lower than that of the second host material. Contributes to luminescence (preferably fluorescent luminescence).

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the second luminescent compound is preferably a compound that does not contain an azine ring structure in its molecule.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the second luminescent compound is preferably not a boron-containing complex, and more preferably the second luminescent compound is not a complex.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the second light emitting layer preferably does not contain a metal complex. Further, in the organic EL device according to the embodiment, it is also preferable that the second light emitting layer does not contain a boron-containing complex.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the second light emitting layer preferably does not contain a phosphorescent material.
Moreover, it is preferable that the second light emitting layer does not contain a heavy metal complex and a phosphorescent rare earth metal complex. Here, examples of heavy metal complexes include iridium complexes, osmium complexes, and platinum complexes.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the second luminescent compound can also be contained in the second luminescent layer. That is, the second light-emitting layer may contain the second light-emitting compound in an amount of 0.5% by mass or more, and may contain more than 1.1% by mass of the total mass of the second light-emitting layer. It can be contained in an amount of 1.2% by mass or more based on the total mass of the second light emitting layer, and can also be contained in an amount of 1.5% by mass or more based on the total mass of the second light emitting layer.
The second light-emitting layer preferably contains a second light-emitting compound in an amount of 10% by mass or less based on the total mass of the second light-emitting layer, and preferably contains a second light-emitting compound in an amount of 7% by mass or less based on the total mass of the second light-emitting layer. It is more preferable to do so, and it is even more preferable that the content is 5% by mass or less based on the total mass of the second light emitting layer.

The second light-emitting layer preferably contains the second compound as the second host material in an amount of 60% by mass or more based on the total mass of the second light-emitting layer, and preferably contains 70% by mass of the total mass of the second light-emitting layer. It is more preferable to contain at least 80% by mass of the total mass of the second light-emitting layer, and it is more preferable to contain at least 90% by mass of the total mass of the second light-emitting layer. It is even more preferred, and even more preferred that the content is 95% by mass or more of the total mass of the second light-emitting layer.
The second light emitting layer preferably contains the second host material in an amount of 99% by mass or less of the total mass of the second light emitting layer.
When the second light emitting layer contains the second host material and the second light emitting compound, the upper limit of the total content of the second host material and the second light emitting compound is 100% by mass.

Note that the organic EL device according to the embodiment does not exclude that the second light emitting layer contains a material other than the second host material and the second light emitting compound.
The second light-emitting layer may contain only one kind of second host material, or may contain two or more kinds of second host materials. The second light-emitting layer may contain only one kind of second light-emitting compound, or may contain two or more kinds of second light-emitting compounds.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the triplet energy T ₁ (DX) of the first luminescent compound or the second luminescent compound and the triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material ) preferably satisfies the relationship of the following formula (Equation 11).
0eV<T ₁ (DX)-T ₁ (H1)<0.6eV (Math. 11)

When the first light-emitting layer contains the first light-emitting compound, the triplet energy T ₁ (D1) of the first light-emitting compound preferably satisfies the relationship of the following formula (Equation 11A).
0eV<T ₁ (D1)-T ₁ (H1)<0.6eV...(Math. 11A)

When the second light-emitting layer contains a second light-emitting compound, the triplet energy T ₁ (D2) of the second light-emitting compound preferably satisfies the relationship of the following formula (Equation 11B).
0eV<T ₁ (D2)-T ₁ (H2)<0.8eV...(Math. 11B)

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, it is preferable that the triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material satisfies the following formula (Equation 12).
T ₁ (H1)>2.0eV...(Math. 12)

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, it is also preferable that the triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material satisfies the relationship of the following formula (Equation 12A), and also satisfies the relationship of the following formula (Equation 12B). It is also preferable.
T ₁ (H1)>2.10eV...(Math. 12A)
T ₁ (H1)>2.15eV...(Math. 12B)

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material satisfies the relationship of the formula (Equation 12A) or the formula (Equation 12B), so that the first light emission is achieved. The triplet excitons generated in the layer are more likely to move to the second light-emitting layer, and are also more likely to be inhibited from moving back from the second light-emitting layer to the first light-emitting layer. As a result, singlet excitons are efficiently generated in the second light-emitting layer, improving luminous efficiency.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, it is also preferable that the triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material satisfies the relationship expressed by the following formula (Equation 12C), and satisfies the relationship expressed by the following expression (Equation 12D). It is also preferable.
2.08eV>T ₁ (H1)>1.87eV...(Math. 12C)
2.05eV>T ₁ (H1)>1.90eV...(Math. 12D)

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material satisfies the relationship of the formula (Equation 12C) or the formula (Equation 12D), so that the first light emission is achieved. Since the energy of triplet excitons generated in the layer does not become larger than necessary and the excited state becomes stable, it is expected that the life of the organic EL device will be extended.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, it is preferable that the triplet energy T ₁ (H2) of the second host material satisfies the following formula (Equation 13).
T ₁ (H2)≧1.9eV (Math. 13)

(Other layers of organic EL element)
The organic EL device according to the embodiment may be composed of only the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer. The organic EL device according to the embodiment preferably has one or more organic layers in addition to the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer. Examples of the organic layer include at least one layer selected from the group consisting of a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, a light emitting layer, an electron injection layer, an electron transport layer, a hole barrier layer, and an electron barrier layer. It will be done.

The organic EL device according to the embodiment includes, for example, at least one selected from the group consisting of a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, an electron injection layer, an electron transport layer, a hole barrier layer, an electron barrier layer, etc. It may further have a layer of.

The organic EL device according to the embodiment may have an anode, a first light emitting layer, a second light emitting layer, and a cathode in this order; The order of the emissive layers can also be reversed. Regardless of the order of the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer, by selecting a material combination that satisfies the relationship of the above formula (Equation 1), the above-mentioned light-emitting layer has a laminated structure. can be expected.

(hole transport layer)
The organic EL device according to the embodiment preferably includes a hole transport layer between the anode and the first light emitting layer.

(electron transport layer)
The organic EL device according to the embodiment preferably includes an electron transport layer between the second light emitting layer and the cathode.

The organic EL device according to the embodiment may further include a third light emitting layer.
The third light-emitting layer includes a third host material, the first host material, the second host material, and the third host material are different from each other, and the third light-emitting layer includes: It includes at least a third luminescent compound that emits light with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less, and the first luminescent compound, the second luminescent compound, and the third luminescent compound are mutually The triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material and the triplet energy T 1 (H3) of the third host material are the same or different, and the triplet energy T ₁ (H3) of the third host material has the relationship expressed by the following formula (Equation 1A) It is preferable to satisfy the following.
T ₁ (H1)>T ₁ (H3)...(Math. 1A)

When the organic EL device according to the embodiment includes a third light emitting layer, the triplet energy T ₁ (H2) of the second host material and the triplet energy T ₁ (H3) of the third host material ) preferably satisfies the relationship of the following formula (Equation 1B).
T ₁ (H2)>T ₁ (H3)...(Math. 1B)

The third light-emitting compound contained in the third light-emitting layer is preferably a compound that emits fluorescence with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, it is preferable that the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer are in direct contact with each other.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, when "the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer are in direct contact", the "first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer are in direct contact with each other". , "contacting" layer structure may also include, for example, any of the following aspects (LS1), (LS2), and (LS3).
(LS1) In the process of vapor deposition of a compound related to the first light-emitting layer and vapor deposition of a compound related to the second light-emitting layer, an area where both the first host material and the second host material are mixed is formed. and the region exists at the interface between the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer.
(LS2) When the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer contain a light-emitting compound, the step of vapor deposition of the compound related to the first light-emitting layer and the step of vapor deposition of the compound related to the second light-emitting layer are performed. An embodiment in which a region in which the first host material, the second host material, and the light-emitting compound coexist is generated during the process, and the region is present at the interface between the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer.
(LS3) When the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer contain a light-emitting compound, the step of vapor deposition of the compound related to the first light-emitting layer and the step of vapor deposition of the compound related to the second light-emitting layer are performed. In the process, a region consisting of the luminescent compound, a region consisting of the first host material, or a region consisting of the second host material is generated, and this region forms the interface between the first luminescent layer and the second luminescent layer. Aspects that exist in

When the organic EL device according to the embodiment includes a third light-emitting layer, the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer are in direct contact with each other, and the second light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer are in direct contact with each other. It is preferable that the third light emitting layer is in direct contact with the third light emitting layer.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, when "the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer are in direct contact with each other", the "second light-emitting layer and the third light-emitting layer are in direct contact with each other". , "contacting" layer structure may also include, for example, any of the following aspects (LS4), (LS5), and (LS6).
(LS4) In the process of vapor deposition of a compound related to the second light-emitting layer and vapor deposition of a compound related to the third light-emitting layer, an area where both the second host material and the third host material are mixed is formed. and the region exists at the interface between the second light-emitting layer and the third light-emitting layer.
(LS5) When the second light-emitting layer and the third light-emitting layer contain a light-emitting compound, the step of vapor deposition of the compound related to the second light-emitting layer and the step of vapor deposition of the compound related to the third light-emitting layer are performed. An embodiment in which a region in which the second host material, the third host material, and the luminescent compound coexist is generated during the process, and the region is present at the interface between the second luminescent layer and the third luminescent layer.
(LS6) When the second light-emitting layer and the third light-emitting layer contain a light-emitting compound, the step of vapor deposition of the compound related to the second light-emitting layer and the step of vapor deposition of the compound related to the third light-emitting layer are performed. In the process, a region consisting of the luminescent compound, a region consisting of the second host material, or a region consisting of the third host material is generated, and this region forms the interface between the second luminescent layer and the third luminescent layer. Aspects that exist in

Moreover, it is also preferable that the organic EL element according to the embodiment further includes a diffusion layer.
The diffusion layer is a layer for smoothly moving triplet excitons from the first light emitting layer to the second light emitting layer, and contains a diffusion layer material. The material for the diffusion layer is not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the relationship of the following formula (23).
That is, when the organic EL element according to the embodiment further includes a diffusion layer, the triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material and the triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the at least one diffusion layer material ) and the triplet energy T ₁ (H2) of the second host material preferably satisfy the relationship of the following formula (Equation 23).
T ₁ (H1)>T ₁ (diffusion layer material)>T ₁ (H2)...(Equation 23)

The organic EL device according to the embodiment is expected to have a longer excitation lifetime of triplet excitons by providing the diffusion layer.
Further, in the organic EL device according to the embodiment, by providing the diffusion layer, it is expected that the diffusion rate of triplet excitons will be improved.
The diffusion layer may contain the diffusion layer material in an amount of 60% by mass or more of the total mass of the diffusion layer, or 70% by mass or more of the total mass of the diffusion layer, and 80% by mass of the total mass of the diffusion layer. It is also possible to contain more than that.
The diffusion layer may contain only one kind of diffusion layer material, or may contain two or more kinds of diffusion layer materials.

When the organic EL element according to the embodiment has a diffusion layer, it is preferable that the diffusion layer is disposed between the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer.

The configuration of the organic EL element 1 will be further explained. Hereinafter, description of symbols may be omitted.

(substrate)
The substrate is used as a support for the organic EL element. As the substrate, for example, glass, quartz, plastic, etc. can be used. Alternatively, a flexible substrate may be used. The flexible substrate refers to a (flexible) substrate that can be bent, and includes, for example, a plastic substrate. Examples of materials forming the plastic substrate include polycarbonate, polyarylate, polyethersulfone, polypropylene, polyester, polyvinyl fluoride, polyvinyl chloride, polyimide, and polyethylene naphthalate. Moreover, an inorganic vapor-deposited film can also be used.

(anode)
For the anode formed on the substrate, it is preferable to use a metal, an alloy, an electrically conductive compound, a mixture thereof, or the like having a large work function (specifically, 4.0 eV or more). Specifically, for example, indium oxide-tin oxide (ITO), indium oxide-tin oxide containing silicon or silicon oxide, indium oxide-zinc oxide, tungsten oxide, and indium oxide containing zinc oxide. , graphene, etc. In addition, gold (Au), platinum (Pt), nickel (Ni), tungsten (W), chromium (Cr), molybdenum (Mo), iron (Fe), cobalt (Co), copper (Cu), palladium ( Pd), titanium (Ti), or a nitride of a metal material (eg, titanium nitride).

These materials are usually formed into films by sputtering. For example, indium oxide-zinc oxide can be formed by a sputtering method by using a target containing 1% by mass or more and 10% by mass or less of zinc oxide relative to indium oxide. Furthermore, for example, indium oxide containing tungsten oxide and zinc oxide contains 0.5% by mass or more of tungsten oxide and 5% by mass or less, and 0.1% by mass or more and 1% by mass or less of zinc oxide relative to indium oxide. By using a target, it can be formed by a sputtering method. In addition, it may be produced by a vacuum evaporation method, a coating method, an inkjet method, a spin coating method, or the like.

Among the EL layers formed on the anode, the hole injection layer formed in contact with the anode is formed using a composite material that allows easy injection of holes regardless of the work function of the anode. , materials that can be used as electrode materials (for example, metals, alloys, electrically conductive compounds, mixtures thereof, and other elements belonging to Group 1 or Group 2 of the Periodic Table of Elements) can be used.

Elements belonging to Group 1 or Group 2 of the periodic table of elements, which are materials with a small work function, such as alkali metals such as lithium (Li) and cesium (Cs), as well as magnesium (Mg), calcium (Ca), and strontium. Alkaline earth metals such as (Sr), alloys containing these (for example, MgAg, AlLi), rare earth metals such as europium (Eu), ytterbium (Yb), alloys containing these, etc. can also be used. In addition, when forming an anode using an alkali metal, an alkaline earth metal, or an alloy containing these, a vacuum evaporation method or a sputtering method can be used. Furthermore, when silver paste or the like is used, a coating method, an inkjet method, etc. can be used.

When the organic EL device according to the embodiment is a top emission type, the anode has a reflective layer. The reflective layer is preferably formed of a metal material having light reflective properties. Light reflectivity means the property of reflecting 50% or more (preferably 80% or more) of the light emitted from the light emitting layer.
Examples of metal materials include single materials such as Al, Ag, Ta, Zn, Mo, W, Ni, and Cr, alloy materials containing these metals as main components (preferably 50% by mass or more of the total), and amorphous alloys. (eg, NiP, NiB, CrP, and CrB), microcrystalline alloys (eg, NiAl and silver alloys), and the like.
In addition, as metal materials, APC (alloy of silver, palladium, and copper), ARA (alloy of silver, rubidium, and gold), MoCr (alloy of molybdenum and chromium), and NiCr (alloy of nickel and chromium) are used. Good too.
The reflective layer may be a single layer or multiple layers.

The anode may be composed of only a reflective layer, or may have a multilayer structure including a reflective layer and a conductive layer (preferably a transparent conductive layer). When the anode has a reflective layer and a conductive layer, it is preferred that the conductive layer is arranged between the reflective layer and the hole transport zone. Further, the anode may have a multilayer structure in which a reflective layer is disposed between two conductive layers (a first conductive layer and a second conductive layer). In the case of such a multilayer structure, the first conductive layer and the second conductive layer may be formed of the same material or may be formed of mutually different materials.
For the conductive layer, it is preferable to use a metal, an alloy, an electrically conductive compound, a mixture thereof, or the like having a large work function (specifically, 4.0 eV or more).
In addition, materials with low work functions, such as elements belonging to Group 1 or Group 2 of the periodic table of elements, such as alkali metals such as lithium (Li) and cesium (Cs), and magnesium (Mg) and calcium (Ca ), alkaline earth metals such as strontium (Sr), alloys containing these (e.g. MgAg, AlLi), rare earth metals such as europium (Eu), ytterbium (Yb), alloys containing these, etc. are used in the conductive layer. You can also do that.

(cathode)
For the cathode, it is preferable to use a metal, an alloy, an electrically conductive compound, a mixture thereof, or the like having a small work function (specifically, 3.8 eV or less). Specific examples of such cathode materials include elements belonging to Group 1 or Group 2 of the periodic table of elements, that is, alkali metals such as lithium (Li) and cesium (Cs), and magnesium (Mg) and calcium (Ca). ), alkaline earth metals such as strontium (Sr), alloys containing these (for example, MgAg, AlLi), rare earth metals such as europium (Eu), ytterbium (Yb), and alloys containing these.

In addition, when forming a cathode using an alkali metal, an alkaline earth metal, or an alloy containing these, a vacuum evaporation method or a sputtering method can be used. Furthermore, when using silver paste or the like, a coating method, an inkjet method, etc. can be used.

By providing an electron injection layer, the cathode can be formed using various conductive materials such as Al, Mg, Ag, ITO, graphene, silicon, or indium oxide-tin oxide containing silicon oxide, regardless of the size of the work function. can be formed. These conductive materials can be formed into films using a sputtering method, an inkjet method, a spin coating method, or the like.

When the organic EL element according to the embodiment is of a top emission type, the cathode is preferably formed of a metal material having a light transmittance or semi-transmission property that transmits light from the light emitting layer. Light transmittance or semi-transparent property means the property of transmitting 50% or more (preferably 80% or more) of the light emitted from the light emitting layer.
For the cathode, it is preferable to use a metal, an alloy, an electrically conductive compound, a mixture thereof, or the like having a small work function (specifically, 3.8 eV or less).

(hole injection layer)
The hole injection layer is a layer containing a substance with high hole injection properties. Substances with high hole injection properties include molybdenum oxide, titanium oxide, vanadium oxide, rhenium oxide, ruthenium oxide, chromium oxide, zirconium oxide, hafnium oxide, tantalum oxide, silver oxide, Tungsten oxide, manganese oxide, etc. can be used.

In addition, as substances with high hole injection properties, 4,4',4''-tris(N,N-diphenylamino)triphenylamine (abbreviation: TDATA), 4,4' , 4''-tris[N-(3-methylphenyl)-N-phenylamino]triphenylamine (abbreviation: MTDATA), 4,4'-bis[N-(4-diphenylaminophenyl)-N-phenyl amino]biphenyl (abbreviation: DPAB), 4,4'-bis(N-{4-[N'-(3-methylphenyl)-N'-phenylamino]phenyl}-N-phenylamino)biphenyl (abbreviation: DNTPD), 1,3,5-tris[N-(4-diphenylaminophenyl)-N-phenylamino]benzene (abbreviation: DPA3B), 3-[N-(9-phenylcarbazol-3-yl)-N -phenylamino]-9-phenylcarbazole (abbreviation: PCzPCA1), 3,6-bis[N-(9-phenylcarbazol-3-yl)-N-phenylamino]-9-phenylcarbazole (abbreviation: PCzPCA2), Aromatic amine compounds such as 3-[N-(1-naphthyl)-N-(9-phenylcarbazol-3-yl)amino]-9-phenylcarbazole (abbreviation: PCzPCN1) and dipyrazino[2,3-f :20,30-h]quinoxaline-2,3,6,7,10,11-hexacarbonitrile (HAT-CN).

Moreover, as a substance with high hole injection property, a high molecular compound (oligomer, dendrimer, polymer, etc.) can also be used. For example, poly(N-vinylcarbazole) (abbreviation: PVK), poly(4-vinyltriphenylamine) (abbreviation: PVTPA), poly[N-(4-{N'-[4-(4-diphenylamino) phenyl]phenyl-N'-phenylamino}phenyl) methacrylamide] (abbreviation: PTPDMA), poly[N,N'-bis(4-butylphenyl)-N,N'-bis(phenyl)benzidine] (abbreviation: Polymer compounds such as Poly-TPD) can be mentioned. Additionally, a polymer compound to which an acid is added, such as poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene)/poly(styrene sulfonic acid) (PEDOT/PSS) or polyaniline/poly(styrene sulfonic acid) (PAni/PSS), is used. You can also do that.

(hole transport layer)
The hole transport layer is a layer containing a substance with high hole transport properties. For the hole transport layer, aromatic amine compounds, carbazole derivatives, anthracene derivatives, etc. can be used. Specifically, 4,4'-bis[N-(1-naphthyl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl (abbreviation: NPB) and N,N'-bis(3-methylphenyl)-N,N'- Diphenyl-[1,1'-biphenyl]-4,4'-diamine (abbreviation: TPD), 4-phenyl-4'-(9-phenylfluoren-9-yl)triphenylamine (abbreviation: BAFLP), 4 , 4'-bis[N-(9,9-dimethylfluoren-2-yl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl (abbreviation: DFLDPBi), 4,4',4''-tris(N,N-diphenylamino) ) triphenylamine (abbreviation: TDATA), 4,4',4''-tris[N-(3-methylphenyl)-N-phenylamino]triphenylamine (abbreviation: MTDATA), 4,4'-bis Aromatic amine compounds such as [N-(spiro-9,9'-bifluoren-2-yl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl (abbreviation: BSPB) can be used. The substances described here mainly have a hole mobility of 10 ⁻⁶ cm ² /(V·s) or more.

The hole transport layer contains CBP, 9-[4-(N-carbazolyl)]phenyl-10-phenylanthracene (CzPA), 9-phenyl-3-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl] Carbazole derivatives such as -9H-carbazole (PCzPA) and anthracene derivatives such as t-BuDNA, DNA, and DPAnth may also be used. Polymer compounds such as poly(N-vinylcarbazole) (abbreviation: PVK) and poly(4-vinyltriphenylamine) (abbreviation: PVTPA) can also be used.

However, materials other than these may be used as long as they have a higher transportability for holes than for electrons. Note that the layer containing a substance with high hole transport properties is not limited to a single layer, and may be a stack of two or more layers made of the above substance.

(electron transport layer)
The electron transport layer is a layer containing a substance with high electron transport properties. The electron transport layer contains 1) metal complexes such as aluminum complexes, beryllium complexes, and zinc complexes, 2) heteroaromatic compounds such as imidazole derivatives, benzimidazole derivatives, azine derivatives, carbazole derivatives, and phenanthroline derivatives, and 3) polymer compounds. can be used. Specifically, low-molecular organic compounds include Alq, tris(4-methyl-8-quinolinolato)aluminum (abbreviation: Almq ₃ ), bis(10-hydroxybenzo[h]quinolinato) beryllium (abbreviation: BeBq ₂ ), Metal complexes such as BAlq, Znq, ZnPBO, ZnBTZ, etc. can be used. In addition to metal complexes, 2-(4-biphenylyl)-5-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole (abbreviation: PBD), 1,3-bis[5- (ptert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl]benzene (abbreviation: OXD-7), 3-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-4-phenyl-5-(4- biphenylyl)-1,2,4-triazole (abbreviation: TAZ), 3-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-4-(4-ethylphenyl)-5-(4-biphenylyl)-1,2,4- Complex compounds such as triazole (abbreviation: p-EtTAZ), bathophenanthroline (abbreviation: BPhen), bathocuproine (abbreviation: BCP), and 4,4'-bis(5-methylbenzoxazol-2-yl)stilbene (abbreviation: BzOs) Aromatic compounds can also be used. In this embodiment, benzimidazole compounds can be suitably used. The substances described here mainly have an electron mobility of 10 ⁻⁶ cm ² /(V·s) or more. Note that any material other than the above may be used as the electron transport layer, as long as it has a higher electron transport property than hole transport property. Further, the electron transport layer may be composed of a single layer, or may be composed of two or more laminated layers made of the above substances.

Moreover, a polymer compound can also be used for the electron transport layer. For example, poly[(9,9-dihexylfluorene-2,7-diyl)-co-(pyridine-3,5-diyl)] (abbreviation: PF-Py), poly[(9,9-dioctylfluorene-2, ,7-diyl)-co-(2,2'-bipyridine-6,6'-diyl)] (abbreviation: PF-BPy), etc. can be used.

(electron injection layer)
The electron injection layer is a layer containing a substance with high electron injection properties. The electron injection layer contains lithium (Li), cesium (Cs), calcium (Ca), lithium fluoride (LiF), cesium fluoride (CsF), calcium fluoride (CaF ₂ ), lithium oxide (LiOx), etc. Alkali metals, alkaline earth metals, or compounds thereof can be used. In addition, a material containing an alkali metal, an alkaline earth metal, or a compound thereof in a substance having electron transport properties, specifically, a material containing magnesium (Mg) in Alq, etc. may be used. Note that in this case, electron injection from the cathode can be performed more efficiently.

Alternatively, a composite material made of a mixture of an organic compound and an electron donor may be used for the electron injection layer. Such a composite material has excellent electron injection and electron transport properties because electrons are generated in the organic compound by the electron donor. In this case, the organic compound is preferably a material that is excellent in transporting generated electrons, and specifically, for example, the above-mentioned substances (metal complexes, heteroaromatic compounds, etc.) constituting the electron transport layer are used. be able to. The electron donor may be any substance that exhibits electron-donating properties to organic compounds. Specifically, alkali metals, alkaline earth metals, and rare earth metals are preferred, and examples include lithium, cesium, magnesium, calcium, erbium, and ytterbium. Moreover, alkali metal oxides and alkaline earth metal oxides are preferable, and examples thereof include lithium oxide, calcium oxide, barium oxide, and the like. Additionally, Lewis bases such as magnesium oxide can also be used. Moreover, organic compounds such as tetrathiafulvalene (abbreviation: TTF) can also be used.

(Capping layer)
When the organic EL device according to the embodiment is a top emission type, it is preferable that the organic EL device includes a capping layer above the cathode.
As the capping layer, for example, a polymer compound, metal oxide, metal fluoride, metal boride, silicon nitride, silicon compound (silicon oxide, etc.), etc. can be used.
Further, aromatic amine derivatives, anthracene derivatives, pyrene derivatives, fluorene derivatives, or dibenzofuran derivatives can also be used in the capping layer.
Furthermore, a laminate in which layers containing these substances are laminated can also be used as the capping layer.

(Layer formation method)
Methods for forming each layer of the organic EL device according to the embodiments are not limited to those specifically mentioned above, and may include dry film formation methods such as vacuum evaporation, sputtering, plasma, and ion plating, Known methods such as wet film forming methods such as spin coating method, dipping method, flow coating method, and inkjet method can be employed.

(film thickness)
The thickness of each organic layer of the organic EL device according to the embodiment is not limited except as specifically mentioned above. In general, if the film thickness is too thin, defects such as pinholes will easily occur, and if the film thickness is too thick, a high applied voltage will be required and the efficiency will deteriorate. A range of nm to 1 μm is preferred.

(First host material, second host material and third host material)
In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the first host material, the second host material, and the third host material include, for example, the following general formula (1), general formula (1X), and general formula (12X). , a first compound represented by general formula (13X), general formula (14X), general formula (15X) or general formula (16X), and a second compound represented by general formula (2) below, etc. Can be mentioned. Moreover, the first compound can also be used as the first host material and the second host material, and in this case, the following general formula (1) used as the second host material, or the following general formula (1X), The compound represented by the general formula (12X), the general formula (13X), the general formula (14X), the general formula (15X) or the general formula (16X) may be conveniently referred to as a second compound.

(first compound)

(In the general formula (1),
R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C(=O)R A group represented by ₈₀₁ ,
- A group represented by COOR ₈₀₂ ,
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms, or a group represented by the general formula (11),
However, at least one of R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ is a group represented by the general formula (11),
When a plurality of groups represented by the general formula (11) are present, the plurality of groups represented by the general formula (11) are the same or different from each other,
L ₁₀₁ is
single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
Ar ₁₀₁ is
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
mx is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5,
When two or more L ₁₀₁ exist, two or more L ₁₀₁ are the same or different,
When two or more Ar _101s exist, the two or more Ar _101s are the same or different,
* in the general formula (11) indicates the bonding position with the pyrene ring in the general formula (1). )

(In the first compound according to the embodiment, R ₉₀₁ , R ₉₀₂ , R ₉₀₃ , R ₉₀₄ , R ₉₀₅ , R ₉₀₆ , R ₉₀₇ , R ₈₀₁ and R ₈₀₂ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
When a plurality of R _901s exist, the plurality of R _901s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _902s exist, the plurality of R _902s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _903s exist, the plurality of R _903s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _904s exist, the plurality of R _904s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _905s exist, the plurality of R _905s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _906s exist, the plurality of R _906s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _907s exist, the plurality of R _907s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _801s exist, the plurality of R _801s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _802s exist, the plurality of R _802s are the same or different from each other. )

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the group represented by the general formula (11) is preferably a group represented by the following general formula (111).

(In the general formula (111),
X ₁ is CR ₁₂₃ R ₁₂₄ , an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or NR ₁₂₅ ,
L ₁₁₁ and L ₁₁₂ are each independently,
single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
ma is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4,
mb is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4,
ma+mb is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4,
Ar ₁₀₁ has the same meaning as Ar ₁₀₁ in the general formula (11),
R ₁₂₁ , R ₁₂₂ , R ₁₂₃ , R ₁₂₄ and R ₁₂₅ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C(=O)R A group represented by ₈₀₁ ,
- A group represented by COOR ₈₀₂ ,
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
mc is 3,
Three R ₁₂₁ are the same or different from each other,
md is 3,
Three R ₁₂₂ 's are the same or different from each other. )

At any one of the positions *1 to *4 of the carbon atoms *1 to *8 in the ring structure represented by the following general formula (111a) in the group represented by the general formula (111), L ₁₁₁ is bonded, R ₁₂₁ is bonded to the remaining three positions of *1 to *4, L ₁₁₂ is bonded to one of the positions of *5 to *8, and the remaining three positions of *5 to *8 are bonded. R ₁₂₂ is attached at three positions.

For example, in the group represented by the general formula (111), L ₁₁₁ is bonded to the *2 carbon atom position in the ring structure represented by the general formula (111a), and L ₁₁₂ is bonded to the group represented by the general formula (111a). When bonded to the *7 carbon atom position in the ring structure represented by 111a), the group represented by the general formula (111) is represented by the following general formula (111b).

(In the general formula (111b),
X ₁ , L ₁₁₁ , L ₁₁₂ , ma, mb, Ar ₁₀₁ , R ₁₂₁ , R ₁₂₂ , R ₁₂₃ , R ₁₂₄ and R ₁₂₅ each independently represent X ₁ , L ₁₁₁ , L in the general formula (111) ₁₁₂ , ma, mb, Ar ₁₀₁ , R ₁₂₁ , R ₁₂₂ , R ₁₂₃ , R ₁₂₄ and R ₁₂₅ ,
A plurality of R _121s are the same or different,
A plurality of R ₁₂₂ 's are the same or different. )

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the group represented by the general formula (111) is preferably a group represented by the general formula (111b).

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment,
ma is 0, 1 or 2,
Preferably, mb is 0, 1 or 2.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment,
ma is 0 or 1,
It is preferable that mb is 0 or 1.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, Ar ₁₀₁ is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment,
Ar ₁₀₁ is
substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group,
substituted or unsubstituted naphthyl group,
substituted or unsubstituted biphenyl group,
substituted or unsubstituted terphenyl group,
substituted or unsubstituted pyrenyl group,
It is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phenanthryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted fluorenyl group.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment,
It is also preferable that Ar ₁₀₁ is a group represented by the following general formula (12), general formula (13) or general formula (14).

(In the general formula (12), general formula (13) and general formula (14),
R ₁₁₁ to R ₁₂₀ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
A group represented by -C(=O)R ₁₂₄ ,
- A group represented by COOR ₁₂₅ ,
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
* in the general formula (12), general formula (13), and general formula (14) represents the bonding position with L ₁₀₁ in the general formula (11), or the general formula (111) or the general formula (111b). ) shows the bonding position with L ₁₁₂ . )

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment,
The first compound is preferably represented by the following general formula (101).

(In the general formula (101),
R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₂₀ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C(=O)R A group represented by ₈₀₁ ,
- A group represented by COOR ₈₀₂ ,
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
However, one of R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ indicates the bonding position with L ₁₀₁ , one of R ₁₁₁ to R ₁₂₀ indicates the bonding position with L ₁₀₁ ,
L ₁₀₁ is
single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
mx is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5,
When two or more L _101s exist, the two or more L _101s are the same or different. )

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment,
L ₁₀₁ is
It is preferably a single bond or a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment,
The first compound is preferably represented by the following general formula (102).

(In the general formula (102),
R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₂₀ each independently have the same meaning as R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₂₀ in the general formula (101),
However, one of R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ indicates the bonding position with L ₁₁₁ , one of R ₁₁₁ to R ₁₂₀ indicates the bonding position with L ₁₁₂ ,
X ₁ is CR ₁₂₃ R ₁₂₄ , an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or NR ₁₂₅ ,
L ₁₁₁ and L ₁₁₂ are each independently,
single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
ma is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4,
mb is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4,
ma+mb is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4,
R ₁₂₁ , R ₁₂₂ , R ₁₂₃ , R ₁₂₄ and R ₁₂₅ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C(=O)R A group represented by ₈₀₁ ,
- A group represented by COOR ₈₀₂ ,
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
mc is 3,
Three R ₁₂₁ are the same or different from each other,
md is 3,
Three R ₁₂₂ 's are the same or different from each other. )

In the compound represented by the general formula (102),
ma is 0, 1 or 2,
Preferably, mb is 0, 1 or 2.

In the compound represented by the general formula (102),
ma is 0 or 1,
mb is preferably 0 or 1.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment,
It is preferable that two or more of R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ are groups represented by the general formula (11).

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment,
Two or more of R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ are groups represented by the general formula (11), and Ar ₁₀₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms. is preferred.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment,
Ar ₁₀₁ is not a substituted or unsubstituted pyrenyl group,
L ₁₀₁ is not a substituted or unsubstituted pyrenylene group,
The substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms as R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ which is not a group represented by the general formula (11) is preferably not a substituted or unsubstituted pyrenyl group.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment,
R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ which are not groups represented by the general formula (11) are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
It is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment,
R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ which are not groups represented by the general formula (11) are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
It is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ that are not groups represented by the general formula (11) are preferably hydrogen atoms.

- Compound represented by general formula (1X) In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the first compound is also preferably a compound represented by general formula (1X) below.

(In the general formula (1X),
R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₂ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C(=O)R A group represented by ₈₀₁ ,
- A group represented by COOR ₈₀₂ ,
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms, or a group represented by the general formula (11X),
However, at least one of R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₂ is a group represented by the general formula (11X),
When a plurality of groups represented by the general formula (11X) are present, the plurality of groups represented by the general formula (11X) are the same or different from each other,
L ₁₀₁ is
single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
Ar ₁₀₁ is
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
mx is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5,
When two or more L ₁₀₁ exist, two or more L ₁₀₁ are the same or different,
When two or more Ar _101s exist, the two or more Ar _101s are the same or different,
* in the general formula (11X) indicates the bonding position with the benz[a]anthracene ring in the general formula (1X). )

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the group represented by the general formula (11X) is preferably a group represented by the following general formula (111X).

(In the general formula (111X),
X ₁ is CR ₁₄₃ R ₁₄₄ , an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or NR ₁₄₅ ,
L ₁₁₁ and L ₁₁₂ are each independently,
single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
ma is 1, 2, 3 or 4,
mb is 1, 2, 3 or 4,
ma+mb is 2, 3 or 4,
Ar ₁₀₁ has the same meaning as Ar ₁₀₁ in the general formula (11),
R ₁₄₁ , R ₁₄₂ , R ₁₄₃ , R ₁₄₄ and R ₁₄₅ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C(=O)R A group represented by ₈₀₁ ,
- A group represented by COOR ₈₀₂ ,
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
mc is 3,
Three R ₁₄₁ are the same or different from each other,
md is 3,
Three R ₁₄₂ 's are the same or different from each other. )

At any one of the positions *1 to *4 of the carbon atoms *1 to *8 in the ring structure represented by the following general formula (111aX) in the group represented by the general formula (111X), L ₁₁₁ is bonded, R ₁₄₁ is bonded to the remaining three positions of *1 to *4, L ₁₁₂ is bonded to any one of the positions of *5 to *8, and the remaining three positions of *5 to *8 are bonded. R ₁₄₂ is attached at three positions.

For example, in the group represented by the general formula (111X), L ₁₁₁ is bonded to the *2 carbon atom position in the ring structure represented by the general formula (111aX), and L ₁₁₂ is the group represented by the general formula (111aX). 111aX), the group represented by the general formula (111X) is represented by the following general formula (111bX).

(In the general formula (111bX),
X ₁ , L ₁₁₁ , L ₁₁₂ , ma, mb, Ar ₁₀₁ , R ₁₄₁ , R ₁₄₂ , R ₁₄₃ , R ₁₄₄ and R ₁₄₅ each independently represent X ₁ , L ₁₁₁ , L in the general formula (111X) ₁₁₂ , ma, mb, Ar ₁₀₁ , R ₁₄₁ , R ₁₄₂ , R ₁₄₃ , R ₁₄₄ and R ₁₄₅ ,
A plurality of R _141s are the same or different from each other,
A plurality of R ₁₄₂ 's are the same or different. )

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the group represented by the general formula (111X) is preferably a group represented by the general formula (111bX).

In the compound represented by the general formula (1X), ma is preferably 1 or 2, and mb is preferably 1 or 2.

In the compound represented by the general formula (1X), ma is preferably 1 and mb is preferably 1.

In the compound represented by the general formula (1X), Ar ₁₀₁ is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In the compound represented by the general formula (1X), Ar ₁₀₁ is
substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group,
substituted or unsubstituted naphthyl group,
substituted or unsubstituted biphenyl group,
substituted or unsubstituted terphenyl group,
Substituted or unsubstituted benz[a]anthryl group,
substituted or unsubstituted pyrenyl group,
It is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phenanthryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted fluorenyl group.

The compound represented by the general formula (1X) is also preferably represented by the following general formula (101X).

(In the general formula (101X),
One of R ₁₁₁ and R ₁₁₂ indicates the bonding position with L ₁₀₁ , one of R ₁₃₃ and R ₁₃₄ indicates the bonding position with L ₁₀₁ ,
R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ , R ₁₂₁ to R ₁₃₀ , R ₁₁₁ or R ₁₁₂ which is not in the bonding position with L ₁₀₁ , and R ₁₃₃ or R ₁₃₄ which is not in the bonding position with L ₁₀₁ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C(=O)R A group represented by ₈₀₁ ,
- A group represented by COOR ₈₀₂ ,
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
L ₁₀₁ is
single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
mx is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5,
When two or more L _101s exist, the two or more L _101s are the same or different. )

In the compound represented by the general formula (1X), L ₁₀₁ is
It is preferably a single bond or a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

The compound represented by the general formula (1X) is also preferably represented by the following general formula (102X).

(In the general formula (102X),
One of R ₁₁₁ and R ₁₁₂ indicates the bonding position with L ₁₁₁ , one of R ₁₃₃ and R ₁₃₄ indicates the bonding position with L ₁₁₂ ,
R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ , R ₁₂₁ to R ₁₃₀ , R ₁₁₁ or R ₁₁₂ which is not in the bonding position with L ₁₁₁ and R ₁₃₃ or R ₁₃₄ which is not in the bonding position with L ₁₁₂ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C(=O)R A group represented by ₈₀₁ ,
- A group represented by COOR ₈₀₂ ,
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
X ₁ is CR ₁₄₃ R ₁₄₄ , an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or NR ₁₄₅ ,
L ₁₁₁ and L ₁₁₂ are each independently,
single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
ma is 1, 2, 3 or 4,
mb is 1, 2, 3 or 4,
ma+mb is 2, 3, 4 or 5,
R ₁₄₁ , R ₁₄₂ , R ₁₄₃ , R ₁₄₄ and R ₁₄₅ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C(=O)R A group represented by ₈₀₁ ,
- A group represented by COOR ₈₀₂ ,
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
mc is 3,
Three R ₁₄₁ are the same or different from each other,
md is 3,
Three R ₁₄₂ are the same or different from each other. )

In the compound represented by the general formula (1X), ma in the general formula (102X) is preferably 1 or 2, and mb is preferably 1 or 2.

In the compound represented by the general formula (1X), ma is preferably 1 and mb is preferably 1 in the general formula (102X).

In the compound represented by the general formula (1X), the group represented by the general formula (11X) is a group represented by the following general formula (11AX) or a group represented by the following general formula (11BX). It is also preferable that

(In the general formula (11AX) and the general formula (11BX),
R ₁₂₁ to R ₁₃₁ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C(=O)R A group represented by ₈₀₁ ,
- A group represented by COOR ₈₀₂ ,
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
When a plurality of groups represented by the general formula (11AX) are present, the plurality of groups represented by the general formula (11AX) are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of groups represented by the general formula (11BX) are present, the plurality of groups represented by the general formula (11BX) are the same or different from each other,
L ₁₃₁ and L ₁₃₂ are each independently,
single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
* in the general formula (11AX) and the general formula (11BX) respectively indicates the bonding position with the benz[a]anthracene ring in the general formula (1X). )

The compound represented by the general formula (1X) is also preferably represented by the following general formula (103X).

(In the general formula (103X),
R ₁₀₁ to R 110 and _{R 112 are} respectively synonymous with R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ and R ₁₁₂ in the general formula (1X),
R ₁₂₁ to R ₁₃₁ , L ₁₃₁ and L ₁₃₂ have the same meanings as R ₁₂₁ to R ₁₃₁ , L ₁₃₁ and L ₁₃₂ in the general formula (11BX), respectively. )

In the compound represented by the general formula (1X), L ₁₃₁ is also preferably a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In the compound represented by the general formula (1X), L ₁₃₂ is also preferably a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In the compound represented by the general formula (1X), two or more of R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₂ are preferably groups represented by the general formula (11).

In the compound represented by the general formula (1X), two or more of R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₂ are groups represented by the general formula (11X), and Ar ₁₀₁ in the general formula (11X) is , a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In the compound represented by the general formula (1X),
Ar ₁₀₁ is not a substituted or unsubstituted benz[a]anthryl group,
L ₁₀₁ is not a substituted or unsubstituted benz[a]antrylene group,
The substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms as R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ which is not a group represented by the general formula (11X) is not a substituted or unsubstituted benz[a]anthryl group. It is also preferable.

In the compound represented by the general formula (1X), R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₂ which are not groups represented by the general formula (11X) are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
It is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In the compound represented by the general formula (1X), R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₂ which are not groups represented by the general formula (11X) are
hydrogen atom,
It is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In the compound represented by the general formula (1X), R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₂ that are not groups represented by the general formula (11X) are preferably hydrogen atoms.

- Compound represented by general formula (12X) In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the first compound is also preferably a compound represented by general formula (12X) below.

(In the general formula (12X),
One or more sets of two or more adjacent ones of R ₁₂₀₁ to R ₁₂₁₀ are
are combined with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring, or are combined with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring,
R ₁₂₀₁ to R ₁₂₁₀ that do not form a substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring and do not form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring are each independently:
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C(=O)R A group represented by ₈₀₁ ,
- A group represented by COOR ₈₀₂ ,
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms, or a group represented by the general formula (121),
However, the substituent when the substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring has a substituent, the substituent when the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring has a substituent, and at least one of R ₁₂₀₁ to R ₁₂₁₀ , a group represented by the general formula (121),
When a plurality of groups represented by the general formula (121) are present, the plurality of groups represented by the general formula (121) are the same or different from each other,
L ₁₂₀₁ is
single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
Ar ₁₂₀₁ is
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
mx2 is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5,
When two or more L ₁₂₀₁ exist, two or more L ₁₂₀₁ are the same or different,
When two or more Ar _1201s exist, the two or more Ar _1201s are the same or different from each other,
* in the general formula (121) indicates the bonding position with the ring represented by the general formula (12X). )

In the general formula (12X), a group consisting of two adjacent ones of R ₁₂₀₁ to R ₁₂₁₀ is a group of R ₁₂₀₁ and R ₁₂₀₂ , a group of R ₁₂₀₂ and R ₁₂₀₃ , and a group of R ₁₂₀₃ and R ₁₂₀₄ . a set of R ₁₂₀₄ and R ₁₂₀₅ , a set of R ₁₂₀₅ and R ₁₂₀₆ , a set of R ₁₂₀₇ and R ₁₂₀₈ , a set of R ₁₂₀₈ and R ₁₂₀₉ , and a set of R ₁₂₀₉ and R ₁₂₁₀ . .

- Compound represented by general formula (13X) In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the first compound is also preferably a compound represented by general formula (13X) below.

(In the general formula (13X),
R ₁₃₀₁ to R ₁₃₁₀ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C(=O)R A group represented by ₈₀₁ ,
- A group represented by COOR ₈₀₂ ,
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms, or a group represented by the general formula (131),
However, at least one of R ₁₃₀₁ to R ₁₃₁₀ is a group represented by the general formula (131),
When a plurality of groups represented by the general formula (131) are present, the plurality of groups represented by the general formula (131) are the same or different from each other,
L ₁₃₀₁ is
single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
Ar ₁₃₀₁ is
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
mx3 is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5,
When two or more L ₁₃₀₁ exist, two or more L ₁₃₀₁ are the same or different,
When two or more Ar _1301s exist, the two or more Ar _1301s are the same or different from each other,
* in the general formula (131) indicates the bonding position with the fluoranthene ring in the general formula (13X). )

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, none of the groups of two or more adjacent R ₁₃₀₁ to R ₁₃₁₀ that are not groups represented by the general formula (131) bond to each other. In the general formula (13X), the groups consisting of two adjacent ones include the group of R ₁₃₀₁ and R ₁₃₀₂ , the group of R ₁₃₀₂ and R ₁₃₀₃ , the group of R ₁₃₀₃ and R ₁₃₀₄ , and the group of R ₁₃₀₄ and R ₁₃₀₅ . , a set of R ₁₃₀₅ and R ₁₃₀₆ , a set of R ₁₃₀₇ and R ₁₃₀₈ , a set of R ₁₃₀₈ and R ₁₃₀₉ , and a set of R ₁₃₀₉ and R ₁₃₁₀ .

- Compound represented by general formula (14X) In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the first compound is also preferably a compound represented by general formula (14X) below.

(In the general formula (14X),
R ₁₄₀₁ to R ₁₄₁₀ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C(=O)R A group represented by ₈₀₁ ,
- A group represented by COOR ₈₀₂ ,
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms, or a group represented by the general formula (141),
However, at least one of R ₁₄₀₁ to R ₁₄₁₀ is a group represented by the general formula (141),
When a plurality of groups represented by the general formula (141) are present, the plurality of groups represented by the general formula (141) are the same or different from each other,
L ₁₄₀₁ is
single bond,
a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
Ar ₁₄₀₁ is
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
mx4 is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5,
When two or more L ₁₄₀₁ exist, two or more L ₁₄₀₁ are the same or different,
When two or more Ar _1401s exist, the two or more Ar _1401s are the same or different from each other,
* in the general formula (141) indicates the bonding position with the ring represented by the general formula (14X). )

- Compound represented by general formula (15X) In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the first compound is also preferably a compound represented by general formula (15X) below.

(In the general formula (15X),
R ₁₅₀₁ to R ₁₅₁₄ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C(=O)R A group represented by ₈₀₁ ,
- A group represented by COOR ₈₀₂ ,
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms, or a group represented by the general formula (151),
However, at least one of R ₁₅₀₁ to R ₁₅₁₄ is a group represented by the general formula (151),
When a plurality of groups represented by the general formula (151) are present, the plurality of groups represented by the general formula (151) are the same or different from each other,
L ₁₅₀₁ is
single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
Ar ₁₅₀₁ is
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
mx5 is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5,
When two or more L ₁₅₀₁ exist, two or more L ₁₅₀₁ are the same or different,
When two or more Ar _1501s exist, the two or more Ar _1501s are the same or different from each other,
* in the general formula (151) indicates the bonding position with the ring represented by the general formula (15X). )

- Compound represented by general formula (16X) In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the first compound is also preferably a compound represented by general formula (16X) below.

(In the general formula (16X),
R ₁₆₀₁ to R ₁₆₁₄ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C(=O)R A group represented by ₈₀₁ ,
- A group represented by COOR ₈₀₂ ,
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms, or a group represented by the general formula (161),
However, at least one of R ₁₆₀₁ to R ₁₆₁₄ is a group represented by the general formula (161),
When a plurality of groups represented by the general formula (161) are present, the plurality of groups represented by the general formula (161) are the same or different from each other,
L ₁₆₀₁ is
single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
Ar ₁₆₀₁ is
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
mx6 is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5,
When two or more L ₁₆₀₁ exist, two or more L ₁₆₀₁ are the same or different,
When two or more Ar _1601s exist, the two or more Ar _1601s are the same or different from each other,
* in the general formula (161) indicates the bonding position with the ring represented by the general formula (16X). )

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the first host material has a connected structure including a benzene ring and a naphthalene ring connected by a single bond in the molecule, and the benzene ring and naphthalene ring in the connected structure Each ring is further independently fused with a single ring or a fused ring, or is not fused, and the benzene ring and naphthalene ring in the linked structure are cross-linked at least in one part other than the single bond. It is also preferable that they are further connected by.
Since the first host material has a connection structure including such crosslinking, it can be expected to suppress deterioration of chromaticity of the organic EL element.
In this case, the first host material has a connected structure (benzene- ) as the minimum unit; a single ring or a fused ring may be further fused to the benzene ring, or a single ring or a fused ring may be further fused to the naphthalene ring. may be condensed. For example, the first host material contains a naphthalene ring and a naphthalene ring connected by a single bond as represented by the following formula (X3), formula (X4), or formula (X5) in the molecule. Also in the connected structure (sometimes referred to as a naphthalene-naphthalene connected structure), one naphthalene ring contains a benzene ring, so it includes a benzene-naphthalene connected structure.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, it is also preferable that the crosslink includes a double bond. That is, it is also preferable that the benzene ring and the naphthalene ring have a structure in which the benzene ring and the naphthalene ring are further connected by a crosslinked structure containing a double bond at a portion other than the single bond.

When the benzene ring and the naphthalene ring in the benzene-naphthalene linkage structure are further connected by crosslinking at at least one moiety other than a single bond, for example, in the case of the above formula (X1), a connection represented by the following formula (X11) In the case of the above formula (X3), it becomes a connected structure (fused ring) represented by the following formula (X31).
When the benzene ring and the naphthalene ring in the benzene-naphthalene linked structure are further connected by a bridge containing a double bond in a portion other than a single bond, for example, in the case of the above formula (X1), it is represented by the following formula (X12). In the case of the above formula (X2), it becomes a connected structure (fused ring) represented by the following formula (X21) or formula (X22), and in the case of the above formula (X4), the following It becomes a connected structure (fused ring) represented by formula (X41), and in the case of formula (X5), it becomes a connected structure (fused ring) represented by formula (X51) below.
When the benzene ring and the naphthalene ring in the benzene-naphthalene connected structure are further connected by a bridge containing a hetero atom (for example, an oxygen atom) in at least one moiety other than a single bond, for example, in the case of the above formula (X1), It becomes a connected structure (fused ring) represented by the following formula (X13).

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the first host material has a biphenyl structure in which the first benzene ring and the second benzene ring are connected by a single bond in the molecule, and in the biphenyl structure, It is also preferable that the first benzene ring and the second benzene ring are further connected by crosslinking at at least one moiety other than the single bond.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, it is also preferable that the first benzene ring and the second benzene ring in the biphenyl structure are further connected by the bridge at one part other than the single bond. Since the first host material has a biphenyl structure including such crosslinking, it can be expected to suppress deterioration of chromaticity of the organic EL element.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, it is also preferable that the crosslink includes a double bond.
In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, it is also preferable that the crosslinking does not include a double bond.

It is also preferable that the first benzene ring and the second benzene ring in the biphenyl structure are further connected by the bridge at two parts other than the single bond.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the first benzene ring and the second benzene ring in the biphenyl structure are further connected by the bridge at two parts other than the single bond, and the bridge is double bonded. It is also preferred that it does not contain a bond. Since the first host material has a biphenyl structure including such crosslinking, it can be expected to suppress deterioration of chromaticity of the organic EL element.

For example, when the first benzene ring and the second benzene ring in the biphenyl structure represented by the following formula (BP1) are further connected by crosslinking at at least one moiety other than a single bond, the biphenyl structure becomes It becomes a connected structure (fused ring) such as the following formulas (BP11) to (BP15).

The formula (BP11) has a structure in which one part other than the single bond is connected by a crosslink that does not contain a double bond.
The formula (BP12) has a structure in which one part other than the single bond is connected by a crosslink containing a double bond.
The formula (BP13) has a structure in which two parts other than the single bond are connected by a crosslink that does not contain a double bond.
The formula (BP14) has a structure in which one of the two parts other than the single bond is connected by a crosslink that does not contain a double bond, and the other of the two parts other than the single bond is connected by a crosslink containing a double bond. It is.
The formula (BP15) has a structure in which two parts other than the single bond are connected by a crosslink containing a double bond.

In the first compound and the second compound, the groups described as "substituted or unsubstituted" are preferably "unsubstituted" groups.

(Method for producing the first compound)
The first compound can be produced by a known method. Furthermore, the first compound can also be produced by following known methods and using known alternative reactions and raw materials in accordance with the desired product.

(Specific example of first compound)
Specific examples of the first compound include the following compounds. However, the present invention is not limited to these specific examples of the first compound.
In the present specification, in specific examples of compounds, D represents a deuterium atom, Me represents a methyl group, and tBu represents a tert-butyl group.

(Second compound)
In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the second compound is a compound represented by the following general formula (2).

(In the general formula (2),
R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C(=O)R A group represented by ₈₀₁ ,
- A group represented by COOR ₈₀₂ ,
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
L ₂₀₁ and L ₂₀₂ are each independently,
single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
Ar ₂₀₁ and Ar ₂₀₂ are each independently,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms. )

(In the second compound according to the embodiment, R ₉₀₁ , R ₉₀₂ , R ₉₀₃ , R ₉₀₄ , R ₉₀₅ , R ₉₀₆ , R ₉₀₇ , R ₈₀₁ and R ₈₀₂ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
When a plurality of R _901s exist, the plurality of R _901s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _902s exist, the plurality of R _902s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _903s exist, the plurality of R _903s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _904s exist, the plurality of R _904s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _905s exist, the plurality of R _905s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _906s exist, the plurality of R _906s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _907s exist, the plurality of R _907s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _801s exist, the plurality of R _801s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _802s exist, the plurality of R _802s are the same or different from each other. )

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment,
R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C(=O)R A group represented by ₈₀₁ ,
- A group represented by COOR ₈₀₂ ,
halogen atom,
A cyano group or a nitro group,
L ₂₀₁ and L ₂₀₂ are each independently,
single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
Ar ₂₀₁ and Ar ₂₀₂ are each independently,
It is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment,
L ₂₀₁ and L ₂₀₂ are each independently,
A single bond, or a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
Ar ₂₀₁ and Ar ₂₀₂ are preferably each independently a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment,
Ar ₂₀₁ and Ar ₂₀₂ are each independently,
phenyl group,
naphthyl group,
phenanthryl group,
biphenyl group,
terphenyl group,
diphenylfluorenyl group,
dimethylfluorenyl group,
benzodiphenylfluorenyl group,
benzodimethylfluorenyl group,
dibenzofuranyl group,
dibenzothienyl group,
A naphthobenzofuranyl group or a naphthobenzothienyl group is preferred.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, the second compound represented by the general formula (2) has the following general formula (201), general formula (202), general formula (203), or general formula (204). , general formula (205), general formula (206), general formula (207), general formula (208) or general formula (209).

(In the general formulas (201) to (209),
L ₂₀₁ and Ar ₂₀₁ are synonymous with L ₂₀₁ and Ar ₂₀₁ in the general formula (2),
R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ each independently have the same meaning as R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ in the general formula (2). )

The second compound represented by the general formula (2) has the following general formula (221), general formula (222), general formula (223), general formula (224), general formula (225), general formula ( It is also preferable that the compound is a compound represented by general formula (226), general formula (227), general formula (228), or general formula (229).

(The above general formula (221), general formula (222), general formula (223), general formula (224), general formula (225), general formula (226), general formula (227), general formula (228) and In general formula (229),
R ₂₀₁ and R ₂₀₃ to R ₂₀₈ each independently have the same meaning as R ₂₀₁ and R ₂₀₃ to R ₂₀₈ in the general formula (2),
L ₂₀₁ and Ar ₂₀₁ are respectively synonymous with L ₂₀₁ and Ar ₂₀₁ in the general formula (2),
L ₂₀₃ has the same meaning as L ₂₀₁ in the general formula (2),
L ₂₀₃ and L ₂₀₁ are the same or different,
Ar ₂₀₃ has the same meaning as Ar ₂₀₁ in the general formula (2),
Ar ₂₀₃ and Ar ₂₀₁ are the same or different. )

The second compound represented by the general formula (2) has the following general formula (241), general formula (242), general formula (243), general formula (244), general formula (245), general formula ( It is also preferable that the compound is a compound represented by general formula (246), general formula (247), general formula (248), or general formula (249).

(The general formula (241), general formula (242), general formula (243), general formula (244), general formula (245), general formula (246), general formula (247), general formula (248) and In general formula (249),
R ₂₀₁ , R ₂₀₂ and R ₂₀₄ to R ₂₀₈ are each independently synonymous with R ₂₀₁ , R ₂₀₂ and R ₂₀₄ to R ₂₀₈ in the general formula (2),
L ₂₀₁ and Ar ₂₀₁ are respectively synonymous with L ₂₀₁ and Ar ₂₀₁ in the general formula (2),
L ₂₀₃ has the same meaning as L ₂₀₁ in the general formula (2),
L ₂₀₃ and L ₂₀₁ are the same or different,
Ar ₂₀₃ has the same meaning as Ar ₂₀₁ in the general formula (2),
Ar ₂₀₃ and Ar ₂₀₁ are the same or different. )

In the second compound represented by the general formula (2), R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ which are not groups represented by the general formula (21) are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
It is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ).

L ₁₀₁ is
A single bond or an unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 22 ring carbon atoms,
Ar ₁₀₁ is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 22 ring carbon atoms.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, in the second compound represented by the general formula (2), R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ , which are substituents of the anthracene skeleton, suppress intermolecular interaction. A hydrogen atom is preferable from the viewpoint of preventing this and suppressing a decrease in electron mobility. However, R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ are a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms. It may also be a substituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.
When R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ become bulky substituents such as alkyl groups and cycloalkyl groups, intermolecular interaction is suppressed, electron mobility with respect to the first host material decreases, and the above formula (Math. There is a possibility that the relationship μ _E2 > μ _E1 described in 16) will not be satisfied. When a second compound is used in the second light-emitting layer, satisfying the relationship μ _E2 > μ _E1 reduces the recombination ability of holes and electrons in the first light-emitting layer and increases the luminous efficiency. It is expected that the decline will be suppressed. In addition, examples of the substituent include a haloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ), a group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ), and - A group represented by S-(R ₉₀₅ ), a group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ), an aralkyl group, a group represented by -C(=O)R ₈₀₁ , a group represented by -COOR ₈₀₂ groups, halogen atoms, cyano groups, and nitro groups may become bulky, and alkyl groups and cycloalkyl groups may become even bulkier.
In the second compound represented by the general formula (2), R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ , which are substituents on the anthracene skeleton, are preferably not bulky substituents, and are preferably not an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group. Preferably, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a haloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ), a group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ) , a group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ), a group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ), an aralkyl group, a group represented by -C(=O)R ₈₀₁ , -COOR ₈₀₂ It is more preferable that it is not a group represented by, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or a nitro group.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment,
In the second compound represented by the general formula (2), R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ) is also preferable.

In the organic EL device according to the embodiment,
In the second compound represented by the general formula (2), R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ are preferably hydrogen atoms.

In the second compound, the substituents in the case of "substituted or unsubstituted" in R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ are the aforementioned substituents that may become bulky, especially substituted or unsubstituted alkyl groups, and substituted or unsubstituted alkyl groups. It is also preferable that it does not contain an unsubstituted cycloalkyl group. Since the substituent in the case of "substituted or unsubstituted" in R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ does not include a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group or a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, etc. It is possible to prevent the interaction between molecules caused by the presence of bulky substituents from being suppressed and to prevent a decrease in electron mobility. When used, a decrease in the recombination ability of holes and electrons in the first light-emitting layer and a decrease in luminous efficiency can be suppressed.

It is more preferable that R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ , which are substituents on the anthracene skeleton, are not bulky substituents, and that R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ as substituents are unsubstituted. Furthermore, in the case where the substituents R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ on the anthracene skeleton are not bulky substituents, when a substituent is bonded to R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ as non-bulky substituents, the substituent is also bulky. Preferably, it is not a substituent, and the substituent bonded to R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ as a substituent is preferably not an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and includes an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a haloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, Alkynyl group, -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ) group, -O-(R ₉₀₄ ), -S-(R ₉₀₅ ), - A group represented by N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ), an aralkyl group, a group represented by -C(=O)R ₈₀₁ , a group represented by -COOR ₈₀₂ , a halogen atom, a cyano group, and a nitro group It is more preferable that it is not.

In the second compound, all groups described as "substituted or unsubstituted" are preferably "unsubstituted" groups.

(Method for producing second compound)
The second compound can be produced by a known method. Further, the second compound can also be produced by following known methods and using known alternative reactions and raw materials that match the desired product.

(Specific example of second compound)
Specific examples of the second compound include the following compounds. However, the present invention is not limited to these specific examples of the second compound.

(First luminescent compound, second luminescent compound, and third luminescent compound)
In the organic EL device according to the embodiment, examples of the first luminescent compound, the second luminescent compound, and the third luminescent compound include the following third compound and the following fourth compound. It will be done.
The third compound and the fourth compound each independently,
A compound represented by the following general formula (3),
A compound represented by the following general formula (4),
A compound represented by the following general formula (5),
A compound represented by the following general formula (6),
A compound represented by the following general formula (7),
A compound represented by the following general formula (8),
It is one or more compounds selected from the group consisting of a compound represented by the following general formula (9) and a compound represented by the following general formula (10).

(Compound represented by general formula (3))
The compound represented by general formula (3) will be explained.

(In the general formula (3),
One or more sets of two or more adjacent ones of R ₃₀₁ to R ₃₁₀ are
bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, or are not bonded to each other,
At least one of R ₃₀₁ to R ₃₁₀ is a monovalent group represented by the following general formula (31),
R ₃₀₁ to R ₃₁₀ that do not form a single ring, do not form a fused ring, and are not monovalent groups represented by the following general formula (31) are each independently:
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

(In the general formula (31),
Ar ₃₀₁ and Ar ₃₀₂ are each independently,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
L ₃₀₁ to L ₃₀₃ are each independently,
single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 30 ring atoms,
* indicates the bonding position in the pyrene ring in the general formula (3). )

In the third compound and the fourth compound, R ₉₀₁ , R ₉₀₂ , R ₉₀₃ , R ₉₀₄ , R ₉₀₅ , R ₉₀₆ and R ₉₀₇ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
A substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
When a plurality of R _901s exist, the plurality of R _901s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _902s exist, the plurality of R _902s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _903s exist, the plurality of R _903s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _904s exist, the plurality of R _904s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _905s exist, the plurality of R _905s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _906s exist, the plurality of R _906s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _907s exist, the plurality of R _907s are the same or different from each other.

In the general formula (3), two of R ₃₀₁ to R ₃₁₀ are preferably groups represented by the general formula (31).

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (3) is a compound represented by the following general formula (33).

(In the general formula (33),
R ₃₁₁ to R ₃₁₈ each independently have the same meaning as R ₃₀₁ to R ₃₁₀ in the general formula (3), which is not a monovalent group represented by the general formula (31),
L ₃₁₁ to L ₃₁₆ are each independently,
single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 30 ring atoms,
Ar ₃₁₂ , Ar ₃₁₃ , Ar ₃₁₅ and Ar ₃₁₆ are each independently,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms. )

In the general formula (31), L ₃₀₁ is preferably a single bond, and L ₃₀₂ and L ₃₀₃ are preferably single bonds.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (3) is represented by the following general formula (34) or general formula (35).

(In the general formula (34),
R ₃₁₁ to R ₃₁₈ each independently have the same meaning as R ₃₀₁ to R ₃₁₀ in the general formula (3), which is not a monovalent group represented by the general formula (31),
L ₃₁₂ , L ₃₁₃ , L ₃₁₅ and L ₃₁₆ are each independently synonymous with L ₃₁₂ , L ₃₁₃ , L ₃₁₅ and L ₃₁₆ in the general formula (33),
Ar ₃₁₂ , Ar ₃₁₃ , Ar ₃₁₅ and Ar ₃₁₆ each independently have the same meaning as Ar ₃₁₂ , Ar ₃₁₃ , Ar ₃₁₅ and Ar ₃₁₆ in the general formula (33). )

(In the general formula (35),
R ₃₁₁ to R ₃₁₈ each independently have the same meaning as R ₃₀₁ to R ₃₁₀ in the general formula (3), which is not a monovalent group represented by the general formula (31),
Ar ₃₁₂ , Ar ₃₁₃ , Ar ₃₁₅ and Ar ₃₁₆ each independently have the same meaning as Ar ₃₁₂ , Ar ₃₁₃ , Ar ₃₁₅ and Ar ₃₁₆ in the general formula (33). )

In the general formula (31), at least one of Ar ₃₀₁ and Ar ₃₀₂ is preferably a group represented by the following general formula (36).
In the general formulas (33) to (35), at least one of Ar ₃₁₂ and Ar ₃₁₃ is preferably a group represented by the following general formula (36).
In the general formulas (33) to (35), at least one of Ar ₃₁₅ and Ar ₃₁₆ is preferably a group represented by the following general formula (36).

(In the general formula (36),
X ₃ represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom,
One or more sets of two or more adjacent ones of R ₃₂₁ to R ₃₂₇ are
bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, or are not bonded to each other,
R ₃₂₁ to R ₃₂₇ that do not form a single ring and do not form a condensed ring are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
* indicates the bonding position with L ₃₀₂ , L ₃₀₃ , L ₃₁₂ , L ₃₁₃ , L ₃₁₅ or L ₃₁₆ . )

It is preferable that X ₃ is an oxygen atom.

At least one of R ₃₂₁ to R ₃₂₇ is
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
It is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In the general formula (31), Ar ₃₀₁ is preferably a group represented by the general formula (36), and Ar ₃₀₂ is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.
In the general formulas (33) to (35), Ar ₃₁₂ is a group represented by the general formula (36), and Ar ₃₁₃ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms. It is preferable that there be.
In the general formulas (33) to (35), Ar ₃₁₅ is a group represented by the general formula (36), and Ar ₃₁₆ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms. It is preferable that there be.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (3) is represented by the following general formula (37).

(In the general formula (37),
R ₃₁₁ to R ₃₁₈ each independently have the same meaning as R ₃₀₁ to R ₃₁₀ in the general formula (3), which is not a monovalent group represented by the general formula (31),
One or more sets of two or more adjacent ones of R ₃₂₁ to R ₃₂₇ are
bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, or are not bonded to each other,
One or more sets of two or more adjacent ones of R ₃₄₁ to R ₃₄₇ are
bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, or are not bonded to each other,
R ₃₂₁ to R 327 and R _{341 to} R ₃₄₇ that do not form a single ring and do not form a condensed ring are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
R ₃₃₁ to R ₃₃₅ and R ₃₅₁ to R ₃₅₅ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
Halogen atom, cyano group, nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms. )

(Specific examples of compounds represented by general formula (3))
Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (3) include the compounds shown below.

(Compound represented by general formula (4))
The compound represented by general formula (4) will be explained.

(In the general formula (4),
Z is each independently CRa or a nitrogen atom,
A1 ring and A2 ring each independently,
A substituted or unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
When there are multiple Ras, one or more sets of two or more adjacent Ras are
bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, or are not bonded to each other,
n21 and n22 are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4,
When there are multiple Rb's, one or more of the pairs consisting of two or more adjacent Rb's are
bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, or are not bonded to each other,
When there are multiple Rcs, one or more sets of two or more adjacent Rcs are
bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, or are not bonded to each other,
Ra, Rb, and Rc that do not form a single ring and do not form a condensed ring are each independently,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms. )

The "aromatic hydrocarbon ring" of the A1 ring and the A2 ring has the same structure as the above-mentioned compound in which a hydrogen atom is introduced into the "aryl group".
The "aromatic hydrocarbon ring" of the A1 ring and the A2 ring includes two carbon atoms on the central fused two-ring structure of the general formula (4) as ring-forming atoms.
Specific examples of the "substituted or unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms" include compounds in which a hydrogen atom is introduced into the "aryl group" described in specific example group G1.

The "heterocycle" of the A1 ring and the A2 ring has the same structure as the compound in which a hydrogen atom is introduced into the "heterocyclic group" described above.
The "heterocycle" of the A1 ring and the A2 ring includes two carbon atoms on the central fused two-ring structure of the general formula (4) as ring-forming atoms.
Specific examples of the "substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle having 5 to 50 ring atoms" include compounds in which a hydrogen atom is introduced into the "heterocyclic group" described in specific example group G2.

Rb is bonded to any of the carbon atoms forming the aromatic hydrocarbon ring as the A1 ring or to any of the atoms forming the heterocycle as the A1 ring.

Rc is bonded to either a carbon atom forming an aromatic hydrocarbon ring as the A2 ring or an atom forming a heterocycle as the A2 ring.

It is preferable that at least one of Ra, Rb and Rc is a group represented by the following general formula (4a), and it is more preferable that at least two are groups represented by the following general formula (4a). .

(In the general formula (4a),
L ₄₀₁ is
single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 30 ring atoms,
Ar ₄₀₁ is
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms, or a group represented by the following general formula (4b). )

(In the general formula (4b),
L ₄₀₂ and L ₄₀₃ are each independently,
single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 30 ring atoms,
The set consisting of Ar ₄₀₂ and Ar ₄₀₃ is
bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, or are not bonded to each other,
Ar ₄₀₂ and Ar ₄₀₃ that do not form a single ring and do not form a fused ring each independently:
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms. )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (4) is represented by the following general formula (42).

(In the general formula (42),
One or more sets of two or more adjacent ones of R ₄₀₁ to R ₄₁₁ are
bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, or are not bonded to each other,
R ₄₀₁ to R ₄₁₁ that do not form a single ring and do not form a condensed ring are each independently:
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms. )

At least one of R ₄₀₁ to R ₄₁₁ is preferably a group represented by the general formula (4a), and more preferably at least two are groups represented by the general formula (4a).
It is preferable that R ₄₀₄ and R ₄₁₁ are groups represented by the above general formula (4a).

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (4) is a compound in which a structure represented by the following general formula (4-1) or general formula (4-2) is bonded to the A1 ring.
In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (42) is represented by the following general formula (4-1) or general formula (4-2) in the ring to which R ₄₀₄ to R ₄₀₇ are bonded. It is a compound with a combined structure.

(In the general formula (4-1), the two *s each independently bond to the ring-forming carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring or the ring-forming atom of the heterocycle as the A1 ring in the general formula (4). or bonded to any of R ₄₀₄ to R ₄₀₇ of the general formula (42),
The three * in the general formula (4-2) each independently bond to a ring-forming carbon atom of an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or a ring-forming atom of a heterocycle as the A1 ring of the general formula (4). , or bonded to any of R ₄₀₄ to R ₄₀₇ of the general formula (42),
One or more pairs of adjacent two or more of R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₇ are
bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, or are not bonded to each other,
One or more pairs of adjacent two or more of R ₄₃₁ to R ₄₃₈ are
bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, or are not bonded to each other,
R ₄₂₁ to R 427 and R _{431 to} R ₄₃₈ which do not form a single ring and do not form a condensed ring are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms. )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (4) is a compound represented by the following general formula (41-3), general formula (41-4), or general formula (41-5). .

(In the general formula (41-3), formula (41-4) and formula (41-5),
A1 ring is as defined in the above general formula (4),
R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₇ each independently have the same meaning as R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₇ in the general formula (4-1),
R ₄₄₀ to R ₄₄₈ each independently have the same meaning as R ₄₀₁ to R ₄₁₁ in the general formula (42). )

In one embodiment, the substituted or unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms as the A1 ring in the general formula (41-5) is
A substituted or unsubstituted naphthalene ring, or a substituted or unsubstituted fluorene ring.

In one embodiment, the substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle having 5 to 50 ring atoms as the A1 ring in the general formula (41-5) is:
substituted or unsubstituted dibenzofuran ring,
A substituted or unsubstituted carbazole ring, or a substituted or unsubstituted dibenzothiophene ring.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (4) or the general formula (42) is selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by the following general formulas (461) to (467). .

(In the general formula (461), general formula (462), general formula (463), general formula (464), general formula (465), general formula (466) and general formula (467),
R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₇ each independently have the same meaning as R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₇ in the general formula (4-1),
R ₄₃₁ to R ₄₃₈ each independently have the same meaning as R ₄₃₁ to R ₄₃₈ in the general formula (4-2),
R ₄₄₀ to R ₄₄₈ and R ₄₅₁ to R ₄₅₄ each independently have the same meaning as R ₄₀₁ to R ₄₁₁ in the general formula (42),
X ₄ is an oxygen atom, NR ₈₀₁ , or C(R ₈₀₂ )(R ₈₀₃ ),
R ₈₀₁ , R ₈₀₂ and R ₈₀₃ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
A substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
When a plurality of R _801s exist, the plurality of R _801s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _802s exist, the plurality of R _802s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _803s exist, the plurality of R _803s are the same or different from each other. )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (42) has one or more pairs of adjacent two or more of R ₄₀₁ to R ₄₁₁ bonded to each other, and substituted or unsubstituted They form a single ring or combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, and this embodiment will be described in detail below as a compound represented by general formula (45).

(Compound represented by general formula (45))
The compound represented by general formula (45) will be explained.

(In the general formula (45),
A set consisting of R ₄₆₁ and R ₄₆₂ , a set consisting of R ₄₆₂ and R ₄₆₃ , a set consisting of R ₄₆₄ and R ₄₆₅ , a set consisting of R ₄₆₅ and R ₄₆₆ , a set consisting of R ₄₆₆ and R ₄₆₇ , Two or more of the groups selected from the group consisting of R ₄₆₈ and R ₄₆₉ , the group consisting of R ₄₆₉ and R ₄₇₀ , and the group consisting of R ₄₇₀ and R ₄₇₁ are combined with each other, forming a substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring or a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring,
however,
A set consisting of R ₄₆₁ and R ₄₆₂ and a set consisting of R ₄₆₂ and R ₄₆₃ ;
A set consisting of R ₄₆₄ and R ₄₆₅ and a set consisting of R ₄₆₅ and R ₄₆₆ ;
A set consisting of R ₄₆₅ and R ₄₆₆ and a set consisting of R ₄₆₆ and R ₄₆₇ ;
The group consisting of R ₄₆₈ and R ₄₆₉ and the group consisting of R ₄₆₉ and R ₄₇₀ ; and the group consisting of R ₄₆₉ and R ₄₇₀ and the group consisting of R ₄₇₀ and R ₄₇₁ do not form a ring at the same time. ,
Two or more rings formed by R ₄₆₁ to R ₄₇₁ are the same or different,
R ₄₆₁ to R ₄₇₁ that do not form a single ring and do not form a condensed ring are each independently:
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
-S-(R ₉₀₅ ), -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms. )

In the general formula (45), R _n and R _n+1 (n represents an integer selected from 461, 462, 464 to 466, and 468 to 470) are bonded to each other, and R _n and R _n+1 are bonded to 2 Together with the two ring-forming carbon atoms, it forms a substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring or a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring. The ring is preferably composed of atoms selected from the group consisting of carbon atoms, oxygen atoms, sulfur atoms, and nitrogen atoms, and the number of atoms in the ring is preferably 3 to 7, more preferably 5 or It is 6.

The number of the above-mentioned ring structures in the compound represented by the general formula (45) is, for example, two, three, or four. The two or more ring structures may be present on the same benzene ring on the mother skeleton of the general formula (45), or may be present on different benzene rings. For example, when there are three ring structures, one ring structure may be present in each of the three benzene rings in the general formula (45).

Examples of the above ring structure in the compound represented by the general formula (45) include structures represented by the following general formulas (451) to (460).

(In the general formulas (451) to (457),
*1 and *2, *3 and *4, *5 and *6, *7 and *8, *9 and *10, *11 and *12 and *13 and *14, respectively, are R _n and R _n+1 represents the two ring-forming carbon atoms to which is bonded,
The ring-forming carbon atoms to which R _n is bonded are *1 and *2, *3 and *4, *5 and *6, *7 and *8, *9 and *10, *11 and *12 and *13. *Can be either of the two ring-forming carbon atoms represented by 14,
X ₄₅ is C(R ₄₅₁₂ ) (R ₄₅₁₃ ), NR ₄₅₁₄ , an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom,
One or more of the sets consisting of two or more adjacent ones of R ₄₅₀₁ to R ₄₅₀₆ and R ₄₅₁₂ to R ₄₅₁₃ ,
bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, or are not bonded to each other,
R ₄₅₀₁ to R ₄₅₁₄ , which do not form a single ring and do not form a condensed ring, each independently have the same meaning as R ₄₆₁ to R ₄₇₁ in the general formula (45). )

(In the general formulas (458) to (460),
*1 and *2, and *3 and *4 each represent the two ring-forming carbon atoms to which R _n and R _n+1 are bonded,
The ring-forming carbon atoms to which R _n is bonded may be either of the two ring-forming carbon atoms represented by *1 and *2, or *3 and *4,
X ₄₅ is C(R ₄₅₁₂ ) (R ₄₅₁₃ ), NR ₄₅₁₄ , an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom,
One or more sets of adjacent two or more of R ₄₅₁₂ to R ₄₅₁₃ and R ₄₅₁₅ to R ₄₅₂₅ ,
bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, or are not bonded to each other,
R ₄₅₁₂ to R ₄₅₁₃ , R ₄₅₁₅ to R 4521 and R ₄₅₂₂ to R ₄₅₂₅ , and R ₄₅₁₄ which do not form the _monocyclic ring and do not form the fused ring each independently represent R in the general formula (45). ₄₆₁ to R ₄₇₁ . )

In the general formula (45), at least one of R ₄₆₂ , R ₄₆₄ , R ₄₆₅ , R ₄₇₀ and R ₄₇₁ (preferably at least one of R ₄₆₂ , R ₄₆₅ and R ₄₇₀ , more preferably R ₄₆₂ ) is , is preferably a group that does not form a ring structure.

(i) In the general formula (45), a substituent when the ring structure formed by R _n and R _n+1 has a substituent,
(ii) In the general formula (45), R ₄₆₁ to R ₄₇₁ which do not form a ring structure, and (iii) R ₄₅₀₁ to R ₄₅₁₄ and R ₄₅₁₅ to R ₄₅₂₅ in formulas (451) to (460) are preferably are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
It is either a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms, or a group selected from the group consisting of the groups represented by the following general formulas (461) to (464).

(In the general formulas (461) to (464),
R _d is each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
_X46 is C( _R801 )( _R802 ), _NR803 , an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom,
R ₈₀₁ , R ₈₀₂ and R ₈₀₃ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
A substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
When a plurality of R _801s exist, the plurality of R _801s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _802s exist, the plurality of R _802s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _803s exist, the plurality of R _803s are the same or different from each other,
p1 is 5,
p2 is 4,
p3 is 3;
p4 is 7,
The * in the general formulas (461) to (464) each independently indicate the bonding position to the ring structure. )
In the third compound and the fourth compound, R ₉₀₁ to R ₉₀₇ are as defined above.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (45) is represented by any of the following general formulas (45-1) to (45-6).

(In the general formulas (45-1) to (45-6),
Rings d to i are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring or a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring,
R ₄₆₁ to R ₄₇₁ each independently have the same meaning as R ₄₆₁ to R ₄₇₁ in the general formula (45). )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (45) is represented by any of the following general formulas (45-7) to (45-12).

(In the general formulas (45-7) to (45-12),
Rings d to f, k, and j are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring or a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring,
R ₄₆₁ to R ₄₇₁ each independently have the same meaning as R ₄₆₁ to R ₄₇₁ in the general formula (45). )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (45) is represented by any of the following general formulas (45-13) to (45-21).

(In the general formulas (45-13) to (45-21),
Rings d to k are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring or a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring,
R ₄₆₁ to R ₄₇₁ each independently have the same meaning as R ₄₆₁ to R ₄₇₁ in the general formula (45). )

When the ring g or the ring h further has a substituent, the substituent is, for example,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by the general formula (461),
Examples include a group represented by the above general formula (463) or a group represented by the above general formula (464).

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (45) is represented by any of the following general formulas (45-22) to (45-25).

(In the general formulas (45-22) to (45-25),
X ₄₆ and X ₄₇ are each independently C(R ₈₀₁ )(R ₈₀₂ ), NR ₈₀₃ , an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom,
R ₄₆₁ to R ₄₇₁ and R ₄₈₁ to R ₄₈₈ each independently have the same meaning as R ₄₆₁ to R ₄₇₁ in the general formula (45).
R ₈₀₁ , R ₈₀₂ and R ₈₀₃ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
A substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
When a plurality of R _801s exist, the plurality of R _801s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _802s exist, the plurality of R _802s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _803s exist, the plurality of R _803s are the same or different from each other. )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (45) is represented by the following general formula (45-26).

(In the general formula (45-26),
_X46 is C( _R801 )( _R802 ), _NR803 , an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom,
R ₄₆₃ , R ₄₆₄ , R ₄₆₇ , R ₄₆₈ , R ₄₇₁ , and R ₄₈₁ to R ₄₉₂ each independently have the same meaning as R ₄₆₁ to R ₄₇₁ in the general formula (45).
R ₈₀₁ , R ₈₀₂ and R ₈₀₃ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
A substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
When a plurality of R _801s exist, the plurality of R _801s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _802s exist, the plurality of R _802s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _803s exist, the plurality of R _803s are the same or different from each other. )

(Specific examples of compounds represented by general formula (4))
Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (4) include the following compounds. In the following specific examples, Ph represents a phenyl group, and D represents a deuterium atom.

(Compound represented by general formula (5))
The compound represented by general formula (5) will be explained. The compound represented by general formula (5) is a compound corresponding to the compound represented by general formula (41-3) described above.

(In the general formula (5),
One or more of the groups consisting of two or more adjacent ones of R ₅₀₁ to R ₅₀₇ and R ₅₁₁ to R ₅₁₇ ,
bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, or are not bonded to each other,
R ₅₀₁ to R ₅₀₇ and R ₅₁₁ to R ₅₁₇ that do not form a single ring and do not form a condensed ring are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.
R ₅₂₁ and R ₅₂₂ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms. )

"A set consisting of two or more adjacent ones of R ₅₀₁ to R ₅₀₇ and R ₅₁₁ to R ₅₁₇ " includes, for example, a set consisting of R ₅₀₁ and R ₅₀₂ , a set consisting of R ₅₀₂ and R ₅₀₃ , and R ₅₀₃ and R ₅₀₄ , R ₅₀₅ and R ₅₀₆ , R ₅₀₆ and R ₅₀₇ , R ₅₀₁ , R ₅₀₂ , and R ₅₀₃ , and so on.

In one embodiment, at least one, preferably two of R ₅₀₁ to R ₅₀₇ and R ₅₁₁ to R ₅₁₇ are groups represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ).

In one embodiment, R ₅₀₁ -R ₅₀₇ and R ₅₁₁ -R ₅₁₇ are each independently:
hydrogen atom,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (5) is a compound represented by the following general formula (52).

(In the general formula (52),
One or more sets of adjacent two or more of R ₅₃₁ to R ₅₃₄ and R ₅₄₁ to R ₅₄₄ ,
bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, or are not bonded to each other,
R ₅₃₁ to R ₅₃₄ , R ₅₄₁ to R 544 , and _{R 551 and} R ₅₅₂ which do not form a single ring and do not form a fused ring are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
R ₅₆₁ to R ₅₆₄ are each independently,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms. )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (5) is a compound represented by the following general formula (53).

(In the general formula (53), R ₅₅₁ , R ₅₅₂ and R 561 to R 564 each independently have the same meaning as R ₅₅₁ , _{R 552 and} R ₅₆₁ to _{R 564 in} the general formula (52).)

In one embodiment, R ₅₆₁ to R ₅₆₄ in the general formula (52) and general formula (53) are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms (preferably a phenyl group). ).

In one embodiment, R ₅₂₁ and R ₅₂₂ in the general formula (5) and R 551 and R ₅₅₂ in the general formulas (52) and ( ₅₃ ) are hydrogen atoms.

In one embodiment, the substituents in the general formula (5), general formula (52), and general formula (53) in the case of "substituted or unsubstituted" are:
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

(Specific examples of compounds represented by general formula (5))
Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (5) include the compounds shown below.

(Compound represented by general formula (6))
The compound represented by general formula (6) will be explained.

(In the general formula (6),
Ring a, ring b, and ring c are each independently,
A substituted or unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
R ₆₀₁ and R ₆₀₂ each independently combine with the a ring, b ring or c ring to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or do not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle,
R ₆₀₁ and R ₆₀₂ which do not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle are each independently,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms. )

Ring a, ring b, and ring c are rings condensed to the central condensed two-ring structure of the general formula (6) consisting of a boron atom and two nitrogen atoms (a substituted or unsubstituted ring having 6 to 50 carbon atoms). aromatic hydrocarbon ring, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle having 5 to 50 ring atoms).

The "aromatic hydrocarbon rings" of ring a, ring b, and ring c have the same structure as the compound in which a hydrogen atom is introduced into the above-mentioned "aryl group."
The "aromatic hydrocarbon ring" of ring a contains three carbon atoms on the central fused two-ring structure of the general formula (6) as ring-forming atoms.
The "aromatic hydrocarbon ring" of ring b and ring c includes two carbon atoms on the central fused two-ring structure of the general formula (6) as ring-forming atoms.

Specific examples of the "substituted or unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms" include compounds in which a hydrogen atom is introduced into the "aryl group" described in specific example group G1.
The "heterocycle" of rings a, b, and c has the same structure as the compound in which a hydrogen atom is introduced into the above-mentioned "heterocyclic group."
The "heterocycle" of ring a contains three carbon atoms on the central fused two-ring structure of the general formula (6) as ring-forming atoms. The "heterocycle" of ring b and ring c includes two carbon atoms on the central fused two-ring structure of the general formula (6) as ring-forming atoms. Specific examples of the "substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle having 5 to 50 ring atoms" include compounds in which a hydrogen atom is introduced into the "heterocyclic group" described in specific example group G2.

R ₆₀₁ and R ₆₀₂ may each independently bond to ring a, ring b, or ring c to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle. The heterocycle in this case includes the nitrogen atom on the central fused two-ring structure of the general formula (6). The heterocycle in this case may contain a heteroatom other than a nitrogen atom. Specifically, the bonding of R ₆₀₁ and R ₆₀₂ with ring a, ring b, or ring c means that the atoms forming ring a, ring b, or ring c bond with the atoms forming ring R ₆₀₁ and R ₆₀₂ . means. For example, R ₆₀₁ may be bonded to ring a to form a 2-ring condensed (or 3 or more condensed) nitrogen-containing heterocycle in which the ring containing R ₆₀₁ and the a ring are condensed. Specific examples of the nitrogen-containing heterocycle include compounds corresponding to a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic group of two or more condensed rings in the specific example group G2.
The same applies to the case where R ₆₀₁ is bonded to ring b, the case where R ₆₀₂ is bonded to ring a, and the case where R ₆₀₂ is bonded to ring c.

In one embodiment, ring a, ring b, and ring c in the general formula (6) are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.
In one embodiment, ring a, ring b, and ring c in the general formula (6) are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted benzene ring or naphthalene ring.

In one embodiment, R ₆₀₁ and R ₆₀₂ in the general formula (6) are each independently:
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
Preferred is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (6) is a compound represented by the following general formula (62).

(In the general formula (62),
R _601A is combined with one or more selected from the group consisting of R ₆₁₁ and R ₆₂₁ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or does not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle,
R _602A is combined with one or more selected from the group consisting of R ₆₁₃ and R ₆₁₄ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or does not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle,
The R _601A and R _602A that do not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle are each independently,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
One or more sets of two or more adjacent ones of R ₆₁₁ to R ₆₂₁ are
bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, or are not bonded to each other,
R ₆₁₁ to R ₆₂₁ that do not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, do not form a monocycle, and do not form a condensed ring are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms. )

R _601A and R _602A in the general formula (62) are groups corresponding to R ₆₀₁ and R ₆₀₂ in the general formula (6), respectively.
For example, R _601A and R ₆₁₁ may be combined to form a 2-ring fused (or 3- or more-ring fused) nitrogen-containing heterocycle in which a ring containing them is fused with a benzene ring corresponding to ring a. Specific examples of the nitrogen-containing heterocycle include compounds corresponding to a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic group of two or more condensed rings in the specific example group G2. The same applies to the cases where R _601A and R ₆₂₁ bond, the cases where R _602A and R ₆₁₃ bond, and the cases where R _602A and R ₆₁₄ bond.

One or more sets of two or more adjacent ones of R ₆₁₁ to R ₆₂₁ are
They may be bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring, or may be bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring.
For example, R ₆₁₁ and R ₆₁₂ may be bonded to form a structure in which a benzene ring, indole ring, pyrrole ring, benzofuran ring, benzothiophene ring, etc. is fused to the six-membered ring to which they are bonded, The formed condensed ring becomes a naphthalene ring, a carbazole ring, an indole ring, a dibenzofuran ring, or a dibenzothiophene ring.

In one embodiment, R ₆₁₁ to R ₆₂₁ that do not contribute to ring formation are each independently:
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In one embodiment, R ₆₁₁ to R ₆₂₁ that do not contribute to ring formation are each independently:
hydrogen atom,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In one embodiment, R ₆₁₁ to R ₆₂₁ that do not contribute to ring formation are each independently:
A hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, R ₆₁₁ to R ₆₂₁ that do not contribute to ring formation are each independently:
A hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
At least one of R ₆₁₁ to R ₆₂₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (62) is a compound represented by the following general formula (63).

(In the general formula (63),
R ₆₃₁ combines with R ₆₄₆ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or does not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle,
R ₆₃₃ combines with R ₆₄₇ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or does not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle,
R ₆₃₄ combines with R ₆₅₁ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or does not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle,
R ₆₄₁ combines with R ₆₄₂ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or does not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle,
One or more sets of two or more adjacent ones of R ₆₃₁ to R ₆₅₁ are
bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, or are not bonded to each other,
R ₆₃₁ to R ₆₅₁ that do not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, do not form a monocycle, and do not form a fused ring are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms. )

R ₆₃₁ may be combined with R ₆₄₆ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle. For example, R ₆₃₁ and R ₆₄₆ combine to form a nitrogen-containing heterocycle of three or more fused rings, in which the benzene ring to which R ₆₄₆ is bonded, the ring containing N, and the benzene ring corresponding to ring a are condensed. It's okay. Specific examples of the nitrogen-containing heterocycle include compounds corresponding to three or more condensed nitrogen-containing heterocyclic groups in specific example group G2. The same applies to the cases where R ₆₃₃ and R ₆₄₇ are bonded, when R ₆₃₄ and R ₆₅₁ are bonded, and when R ₆₄₁ and R ₆₄₂ are bonded.

In one embodiment, R ₆₃₁ to R ₆₅₁ that do not contribute to ring formation are each independently:
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In one embodiment, R ₆₃₁ to R ₆₅₁ that do not contribute to ring formation are each independently:
hydrogen atom,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In one embodiment, R ₆₃₁ to R ₆₅₁ that do not contribute to ring formation are each independently:
A hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, R ₆₃₁ to R ₆₅₁ that do not contribute to ring formation are each independently:
A hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
At least one of R ₆₃₁ to R ₆₅₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (63) is a compound represented by the following general formula (63A).

(In the general formula (63A),
_R661 is
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
R ₆₆₂ to R ₆₆₅ are each independently,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms. )

In one embodiment, R ₆₆₁ - R ₆₆₅ are each independently:
A substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, R ₆₆₁ to R ₆₆₅ are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (63) is a compound represented by the following general formula (63B).

(In the general formula (63B),
R ₆₇₁ and R ₆₇₂ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
-N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ), or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
R ₆₇₃ to R ₆₇₅ are each independently,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
-N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ), or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms. )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (63) is a compound represented by the following general formula (63B').

(In the general formula (63B'), R ₆₇₂ to R ₆₇₅ each independently have the same meaning as R ₆₇₂ to R ₆₇₅ in the general formula (63B).)

In one embodiment, at least one of R ₆₇₁ to R ₆₇₅ is
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
-N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ), or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In one embodiment,
_R672 is
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
-N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ), or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
R ₆₇₁ and R ₆₇₃ to R ₆₇₅ are each independently,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
-N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ), or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (63) is a compound represented by the following general formula (63C).

(In the general formula (63C),
R ₆₈₁ and R ₆₈₂ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.
R ₆₈₃ to R ₆₈₆ are each independently,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms. )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (63) is a compound represented by the following general formula (63C').

(In the general formula (63C'), R ₆₈₃ to R ₆₈₆ each independently have the same meaning as R ₆₈₃ to R ₆₈₆ in the general formula (63C).)

In one embodiment, R ₆₈₁ - R ₆₈₆ are each independently:
A substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, R ₆₈₁ to R ₆₈₆ are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

The compound represented by the general formula (6) is prepared by first bonding ring a, ring b, and ring c with a linking group (a group containing NR ₆₀₁ and a group containing NR ₆₀₂ ) to form an intermediate. (first reaction), and by bonding ring a, ring b, and ring c with a linking group (group containing a boron atom), the final product can be manufactured (second reaction). In the first reaction, an amination reaction such as Bachbult-Hartwig reaction can be applied. In the second reaction, a tandem hetero Friedel-Crafts reaction or the like can be applied.

(Specific examples of compounds represented by general formula (6))
Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (6) are described below, but these are merely examples, and the compound represented by the general formula (6) is not limited to the following specific examples.

(Compound represented by general formula (7))
The compound represented by general formula (7) will be explained.

(In the general formula (7),
The r ring is a ring represented by the general formula (72) or general formula (73) condensed at any position of adjacent rings,
The q ring and the s ring are each independently a ring represented by the general formula (74) fused at any position of an adjacent ring,
The p-ring and the t-ring are each independently a structure represented by the general formula (75) or general formula (76) condensed at any position of an adjacent ring,
X ₇ is an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or NR ₇₀₂ .
When there are multiple R _701s , adjacent R _701s are
bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, or are not bonded to each other,
R ₇₀₁ and R ₇₀₂ that do not form a single ring and do not form a fused ring are each independently:
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
Ar ₇₀₁ and Ar ₇₀₂ are each independently,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
L ₇₀₁ is
Substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenylene group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkynylene group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkylene group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
m1 is 0, 1 or 2,
m2 is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4,
m3 is each independently 0, 1, 2 or 3,
m4 is each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5,
When a plurality of R _701s exist, the plurality of R _701s are the same or different,
When there are multiple X _7s , the multiple X _7s are the same or different,
When a plurality of R _702s exist, the plurality of R _702s are the same or different,
When a plurality of Ar _701s exist, the plurality of Ar _701s are the same or different from each other,
When there are multiple Ar ₇₀₂ , the multiple Ar ₇₀₂ are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of L ₇₀₁ exist, the plurality of L ₇₀₁ are the same or different from each other. )

In the general formula (7), each of the p-ring, q-ring, r-ring, s-ring, and t-ring shares two carbon atoms and is condensed with the adjacent ring. The position and direction of condensation are not limited, and condensation can be performed at any position and direction.

In one embodiment, in the general formula (72) or general formula (73) as the r ring, m1=0 or m2=0.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (7) is represented by any of the following general formulas (71-1) to (71-6).

(In the general formulas (71-1) to (71-6), R ₇₀₁ , X ₇ , Ar ₇₀₁ , Ar ₇₀₂ , L ₇₀₁ , m1 and m3 each represent R ₇₀₁ in the general formula (7) , X ₇ , Ar ₇₀₁ , Ar ₇₀₂ , L ₇₀₁ , m1 and m3).

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (7) is represented by any of the following general formulas (71-11) to (71-13).

(In the general formulas (71-11) to (71-13), R ₇₀₁ , X ₇ , Ar ₇₀₁ , Ar ₇₀₂ , L ₇₀₁ , m1, m3 and m4 are respectively Synonymous with R ₇₀₁ , X ₇ , Ar ₇₀₁ , Ar ₇₀₂ , L ₇₀₁ , m1, m3 and m4).

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (7) is represented by any of the following general formulas (71-21) to (71-25).

(In the general formulas (71-21) to (71-25), R ₇₀₁ , X ₇ , Ar ₇₀₁ , Ar ₇₀₂ , L ₇₀₁ , m1 and m4 each represent R ₇₀₁ in the general formula (7) , X ₇ , Ar ₇₀₁ , Ar ₇₀₂ , L ₇₀₁ , m1 and m4).

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (7) is represented by any of the following general formulas (71-31) to (71-33).

(In the general formulas (71-31) to (71-33), R ₇₀₁ , X ₇ , Ar ₇₀₁ , Ar ₇₀₂ , L ₇₀₁ , m2 to m4 are each R ₇₀₁ in the general formula (7) , X ₇ , Ar ₇₀₁ , Ar ₇₀₂ , L ₇₀₁ , m2 to m4).

In one embodiment, Ar ₇₀₁ and Ar ₇₀₂ are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, one of Ar ₇₀₁ and Ar ₇₀₂ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, and the other of Ar ₇₀₁ and Ar ₇₀₂ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 5 ring atoms. ~50 heterocyclic groups.

(Specific examples of compounds represented by general formula (7))
Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (7) include the compounds shown below.

(Compound represented by general formula (8))
The compound represented by general formula (8) will be explained.

(In the general formula (8),
At least one set of R ₈₀₁ and R ₈₀₂ , R ₈₀₂ and R ₈₀₃ , and R ₈₀₃ and R ₈₀₄ combine with each other to form a divalent group represented by the following general formula (82),
At least one set of R ₈₀₅ and R ₈₀₆ , R ₈₀₆ and R ₈₀₇ , and R ₈₀₇ and R ₈₀₈ combine with each other to form a divalent group represented by the following general formula (83). )

(At least one of R ₈₀₁ to R ₈₀₄ that does not form a divalent group represented by the general formula (82) and R ₈₁₁ to R ₈₁₄ is a monovalent group represented by the following general formula (84), and ,
At least one of R ₈₀₅ to R ₈₀₈ and R ₈₂₁ to R ₈₂₄ that do not form a divalent group represented by the general formula (83) is a monovalent group represented by the following general formula (84),
X ₈ is an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or NR ₈₀₉ ,
R ₈₀₁ to R ₈₀₈ that do not form a divalent group represented by the general formula (82) or (83) and are not a monovalent group represented by the general formula (84), R ₈₁₁ to R ₈₁₄ and R ₈₂₁ to R ₈₂₄ and R ₈₀₉ which are not monovalent groups represented by general formula (84) are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms. )

(In the general formula (84),
Ar ₈₀₁ and Ar ₈₀₂ are each independently,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
L ₈₀₁ to L ₈₀₃ are each independently,
single bond,
a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 30 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 30 ring atoms, and a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 5 to 30 ring atoms. A divalent linking group formed by bonding 2 to 4 groups selected from the group consisting of divalent heterocyclic groups,
* in the general formula (84) indicates the bonding position with the ring structure represented by the general formula (8), or the group represented by the general formula (82) or general formula (83). )

In the general formula (8), the positions where the divalent group represented by the general formula (82) and the divalent group represented by the general formula (83) are formed are not particularly limited, and R ₈₀₁ to R ₈₀₈ The group can be formed in any possible position.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (8) is represented by any of the following general formulas (81-1) to (81-6).

(In the general formulas (81-1) to (81-6),
X ₈ has the same meaning as X ₈ in the general formula (8),
At least two of R ₈₀₁ to R ₈₂₄ are monovalent groups represented by the general formula (84),
R ₈₀₁ to R ₈₂₄ which are not monovalent groups represented by the general formula (84) are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms. )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (8) is represented by any of the following general formulas (81-7) to (81-18).

(In the general formulas (81-7) to (81-18),
X ₈ has the same meaning as X ₈ in the general formula (8),
* is a single bond bonded to the monovalent group represented by the general formula (84),
R ₈₀₁ to R ₈₂₄ are each independently R ₈₀₁ to R ₈₂₄ which is not a monovalent group represented by the general formula (84) in the general formulas (81-1) to (81-6); are synonymous. )

R ₈₀₁ to R ₈₀₈ that do not form a divalent group represented by the general formula (82) and general formula (83) and are not a monovalent group represented by the general formula (84), and , R ₈₁₁ to R ₈₁₄ and R ₈₂₁ to R ₈₂₄ which are not monovalent groups represented by the general formula (84) are preferably each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

The monovalent group represented by the general formula (84) is preferably represented by the following general formula (85) or general formula (86).

(In the general formula (85),
R ₈₃₁ to R ₈₄₀ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
* in the general formula (85) has the same meaning as * in the general formula (84). )

(In the general formula (86),
Ar ₈₀₁ , L ₈₀₁ and L ₈₀₃ are synonymous with Ar ₈₀₁ , L ₈₀₁ and L ₈₀₃ in the general formula (84),
HAr ₈₀₁ has a structure represented by the following general formula (87). )

(In the general formula (87),
X ₈₁ is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom,
Any one of R ₈₄₁ to R ₈₄₈ is a single bond bonded to L ₈₀₃ ,
R ₈₄₁ to R ₈₄₈ which are not single bonds are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms. )

(Specific examples of compounds represented by general formula (8))
Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (8) include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2014/104144, as well as the compounds shown below.

(Compound represented by general formula (9))
The compound represented by general formula (9) will be explained.

(In the general formula (9),
A ₉₁ ring and A ₉₂ ring are each independently,
A substituted or unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or
A substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
One or more rings selected from the group consisting of A ₉₁ ring and A ₉₂ ring,
It is bonded to * in the structure represented by the following general formula (92). )

(In the general formula (92),
A ₉₃ ring is
A substituted or unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or
A substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
_X9 is _NR93 , C( _R94 )( _R95 ), Si( _R96 )( _R97 ), Ge( _R98 )( _R99 ), oxygen atom, sulfur atom or selenium atom,
R ₉₁ and R ₉₂ are
bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, or are not bonded to each other,
R ₉₁ and R ₉₂ that do not form a single ring and do not form a fused ring, and R ₉₃ to R ₉₉ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms. )

One or more rings selected from the group consisting of A ₉₁ ring and A ₉₂ ring are bonded to * in the structure represented by general formula (92). That is, in one embodiment, the ring-forming carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring of the A ₉₁ ring or the ring-forming atom of the heterocycle is bonded to * in the structure represented by the general formula (92). In one embodiment, the ring-forming carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring of the A ₉₂ ring or the ring-forming atom of the heterocycle is bonded to * in the structure represented by the general formula (92).

In one embodiment, a group represented by the following general formula (93) is bonded to either or both of the A ₉₁ ring and the A ₉₂ ring.

(In the general formula (93),
Ar ₉₁ and Ar ₉₂ are each independently,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
L ₉₁ to L ₉₃ are each independently,
single bond,
a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 30 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 30 ring atoms, and a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 5 to 30 ring atoms. A divalent linking group formed by bonding 2 to 4 members selected from the group consisting of divalent heterocyclic groups,
* in the general formula (93) indicates the bonding position with either the A ₉₁ ring or the A ₉₂ ring. )

In one embodiment, in addition to the A ₉₁ ring, the ring-forming carbon atoms of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring of the A ₉₂ ring or the ring-forming atoms of the heterocycle have the structure represented by the general formula (92). Combine with *. In this case, the structures represented by the general formula (92) may be the same or different.

In one embodiment, R ₉₁ and R ₉₂ are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.
In one embodiment, R ₉₁ and R ₉₂ are combined with each other to form a fluorene structure.

In one embodiment, Ring A ₉₁ and Ring A ₉₂ are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, for example, a substituted or unsubstituted benzene ring. .

In one embodiment, ring A ₉₃ is a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, for example, a substituted or unsubstituted benzene ring.
In one embodiment, X ₉ is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.

(Specific examples of compounds represented by general formula (9))
Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (9) include the following compounds.

(Compound represented by general formula (10))
The compound represented by general formula (10) will be explained.

(In the general formula (10),
Ax ₁ ring is a ring represented by the general formula (10a) fused at any position of adjacent rings,
Ax ₂ ring is a ring represented by the general formula (10b) fused at any position of adjacent rings,
The two * in the general formula (10b) are bonded to any position of the Ax ₃ ring,
X _A and X _B are each independently C (R ₁₀₀₃ ) (R ₁₀₀₄ ), Si (R ₁₀₀₅ ) (R ₁₀₀₆ ), an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom,
Ax ₃ ring is
A substituted or unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
Ar ₁₀₀₁ is
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
R ₁₀₀₁ to R ₁₀₀₆ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
mx1 is 3, mx2 is 2,
A plurality of R _1001s are the same or different from each other,
A plurality of R ₁₀₀₂ are the same or different from each other,
ax is 0, 1 or 2,
When ax is 0 or 1, the structures in parentheses indicated by "3-ax" are the same or different,
When ax is 2, the plurality of Ar ₁₀₀₁ are the same or different from each other. )

In one embodiment, Ar ₁₀₀₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, the Ax ₃ ring is a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, such as a substituted or unsubstituted benzene ring, a substituted or unsubstituted naphthalene ring, or It is a substituted or unsubstituted anthracene ring.

In one embodiment, R ₁₀₀₃ and R ₁₀₀₄ are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, ax is 1.

(Specific examples of compounds represented by general formula (10))
Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (10) include the following compounds.

In one embodiment, the light-emitting layer contains at least one of a third compound and a fourth compound,
A compound represented by the general formula (4),
A compound represented by the general formula (5),
A compound represented by the general formula (7),
A compound represented by the general formula (8),
It contains one or more compounds selected from the group consisting of the compound represented by the general formula (9) above and the compound represented by the following general formula (63a).

(In the general formula (63a),
R ₆₃₁ combines with R ₆₄₆ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or does not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle.
R ₆₃₃ combines with R ₆₄₇ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or does not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle.
R ₆₃₄ combines with R ₆₅₁ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or does not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle.
R ₆₄₁ combines with R ₆₄₂ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or does not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle.
One or more adjacent sets of two or more of R ₆₃₁ to R ₆₅₁ are
bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, or are not bonded to each other,
R ₆₃₁ to R ₆₅₁ that do not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, do not form a monocycle, and do not form a fused ring are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
However, at least one of R ₆₃₁ to R ₆₅₁ that does not form the substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, does not form the monocycle, and does not form the fused ring,
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms. )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (4) is a compound represented by the general formula (41-3), general formula (41-4), or general formula (41-5). , A1 ring in the general formula (41-5) is a substituted or unsubstituted fused aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 10 to 50 ring-forming carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring having 8 to 50 ring-forming atoms. It is a heterocycle.

In one embodiment, the substituted or unsubstituted fused aromatic ring having 10 to 50 carbon atoms in the general formula (41-3), general formula (41-4), and general formula (41-5) The hydrocarbon ring is
substituted or unsubstituted naphthalene ring,
a substituted or unsubstituted anthracene ring, or a substituted or unsubstituted fluorene ring,
The substituted or unsubstituted fused heterocycle having 8 to 50 ring atoms,
substituted or unsubstituted dibenzofuran ring,
A substituted or unsubstituted carbazole ring, or a substituted or unsubstituted dibenzothiophene ring.

In one embodiment, the substituted or unsubstituted fused aromatic carbon having 10 to 50 ring carbon atoms in the general formula (41-3), general formula (41-4) or general formula (41-5) The hydrogen ring is
a substituted or unsubstituted naphthalene ring, or a substituted or unsubstituted fluorene ring,
The substituted or unsubstituted fused heterocycle having 8 to 50 ring atoms,
substituted or unsubstituted dibenzofuran ring,
A substituted or unsubstituted carbazole ring, or a substituted or unsubstituted dibenzothiophene ring.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (4) is
A compound represented by the following general formula (461),
A compound represented by the following general formula (462),
A compound represented by the following general formula (463),
A compound represented by the following general formula (464),
A compound represented by the following general formula (465),
It is selected from the group consisting of a compound represented by the following general formula (466) and a compound represented by the following general formula (467).

(In the general formulas (461) to (467),
One or more of the groups consisting of two or more adjacent ones of R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₇ , R ₄₃₁ to R ₄₃₆ , R ₄₄₀ to R ₄₄₈ , and R ₄₅₁ to R ₄₅₄ ,
bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring, or are not bonded to each other,
R ₄₃₇ , R ₄₃₈ , and R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₇ , R ₄₃₁ to R ₄₃₆ , R ₄₄₀ to R 448 and R ₄₅₁ to R ₄₅₄ which do not form a single ring and do not form a fused _ring are each independently ,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
A group represented by -Si(R ₉₀₁ )(R ₉₀₂ )(R ₉₀₃ ),
A group represented by -O-(R ₉₀₄ ),
A group represented by -S-(R ₉₀₅ ),
A group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
X ₄ is an oxygen atom, NR ₈₀₁ , or C(R ₈₀₂ )(R ₈₀₃ ),
R ₈₀₁ , R ₈₀₂ and R ₈₀₃ are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;
A substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
When a plurality of R _801s exist, the plurality of R _801s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _802s exist, the plurality of R _802s are the same or different from each other,
When a plurality of R _803s exist, the plurality of R _803s are the same or different from each other. )

In one embodiment, R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₇ and R ₄₄₀ to R ₄₄₈ are each independently:
hydrogen atom,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In one embodiment, R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₇ and R ₄₄₀ to R ₄₄₇ are each independently:
hydrogen atom,
It is selected from the group consisting of a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 18 ring carbon atoms, and a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 18 ring atoms.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (41-3) is a compound represented by the following general formula (41-3-1).

(In the general formula (41-3-1), R ₄₂₃ , R ₄₂₅ , R ₄₂₆ , R ₄₄₂ , R ₄₄₄ and R ₄₄₅ are each independently R ₄₂₃ , R ₄₂₅ in the general formula (41-3) , R ₄₂₆ , R ₄₄₂ , R ₄₄₄ and R ₄₄₅ ).

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (41-3) is a compound represented by the following general formula (41-3-2).

(In the general formula (41-3-2), R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₇ and R ₄₄₀ to R ₄₄₈ each independently represent R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₇ and R ₄₄₀ to R ₄₄₈ in the general formula (41-3). is synonymous with
However, at least one of R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₇ and R ₄₄₀ to R ₄₄₆ is a group represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ). )

In one embodiment, any two of R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₇ and R ₄₄₀ to R ₄₄₆ in the formula (41-3-2) are groups represented by -N(R ₉₀₆ )(R ₉₀₇ ). be.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (41-3-2) is a compound represented by the following formula (41-3-3).

(In the general formula (41-3-3), R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₄ , R ₄₄₀ to R ₄₄₃ , R ₄₄₇ and R ₄₄₈ each independently represent R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₄ in the general formula (41-3) , R ₄₄₀ to R ₄₄₃ , R ₄₄₇ and R ₄₄₈ ,
R _A , R _B , R _C and R _D are each independently,
A substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 18 ring atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 18 ring atoms. )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (41-3-3) is a compound represented by the following formula (41-3-4).

(In the general formula (41-3-4), R ₄₄₇ , R ₄₄₈ , R _A , R _B , R _C and R _D are each independently R ₄₄₇ , R in the formula (41-3-3) ₄₄₈ , R _A , R _B , R _C and R _D ).

In one embodiment, R _A , R _B , R _C and R _D each independently represent a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 18 ring carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, R _A , R _B , R _C and R _D each independently represent a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group.

In one embodiment, R ₄₄₇ and R ₄₄₈ are hydrogen atoms.

In one embodiment, the substituent in the case of "substituted or unsubstituted" in each of the above formulas is
unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,
-Si(R _901a )(R _902a )(R _903a ),
-O-(R _904a ),
-S- (R _905a ),
-N(R _906a )(R _907a ),
halogen atom,
cyano group,
nitro group,
An unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or an unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
R _901a to R _907a are each independently,
hydrogen atom,
unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
An unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or an unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms,
When two or more R _901a are present, two or more R _901a are the same or different,
When two or more R _902a are present, two or more R _902a are the same or different,
When two or more R _903a are present, two or more R _903a are the same or different,
When two or more R _904a are present, two or more R _904a are the same or different,
When two or more R _905a are present, two or more R _905a are the same or different,
When two or more R _906a are present, two or more R _906a are the same or different,
When two or more R _907a 's exist, the two or more R _907a 's are the same or different from each other.

In one embodiment, the substituent in the case of "substituted or unsubstituted" in each of the above formulas is
unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
An unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or an unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In one embodiment, the substituent in the case of "substituted or unsubstituted" in each of the above formulas is
unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms,
An unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 18 ring carbon atoms, or an unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 18 ring atoms.

[Second embodiment]
(Electronics)
The electronic device according to this embodiment is equipped with the organic EL element according to any of the embodiments described above. Examples of electronic devices include display devices and light emitting devices. Examples of display devices include display components (eg, organic EL panel modules, etc.), televisions, mobile phones, tablets, personal computers, and the like. Examples of the light emitting device include lighting, vehicle lamps, and the like.

[Variation of embodiment]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and any changes, improvements, etc. that can achieve the purpose of the present invention are included in the present invention.

For example, the number of light emitting layers is not limited to two, and more than two light emitting layers may be stacked. When the organic EL element has more than two light-emitting layers, it is sufficient that at least two light-emitting layers satisfy the conditions described in the above embodiments. For example, the other light-emitting layer may be a fluorescent-type light-emitting layer or a phosphorescent-type light-emitting layer that utilizes light emission due to electronic transition directly from a triplet excited state to a ground state.
In addition, when the organic EL element has a plurality of light emitting layers, these light emitting layers may be provided adjacent to each other, or a so-called tandem type organic EL element may be provided in which a plurality of light emitting units are stacked with an intermediate layer interposed therebetween. It may also be an EL element.

Further, for example, a barrier layer may be provided adjacent to at least one of the anode side and the cathode side of the light emitting layer. Preferably, the barrier layer is disposed in contact with the light-emitting layer and blocks at least one of holes, electrons, and excitons.
For example, when a barrier layer is placed in contact with the emitting layer on the cathode side, the barrier layer transports electrons and holes reach the layer on the cathode side (e.g., electron transport layer) than the barrier layer. prevent you from doing When the organic EL element includes an electron transport layer, it is preferable to include the barrier layer between the light emitting layer and the electron transport layer.
Furthermore, when a barrier layer is disposed in contact with the light emitting layer on the anode side, the barrier layer transports holes and electrons are transferred to a layer on the anode side (for example, a hole transport layer) than the barrier layer. prevent it from reaching. When the organic EL element includes a hole transport layer, it is preferable to include the barrier layer between the light emitting layer and the hole transport layer.
Furthermore, a barrier layer may be provided adjacent to the light-emitting layer to prevent excitation energy from leaking from the light-emitting layer to its surrounding layers. Excitons generated in the light emitting layer are prevented from moving to layers closer to the electrode than the barrier layer (for example, an electron transport layer, a hole transport layer, etc.).
It is preferable that the light-emitting layer and the barrier layer are bonded to each other.

In addition, the specific structure, shape, etc. in carrying out the present invention may be changed to other structures as long as the object of the present invention can be achieved.

<Compound>
The structures of the compounds as the first host material or the second host material according to Examples 1 to 3 are shown below.

The structures of other compounds used in the production of organic EL devices according to Examples 1 to 2 and Comparative Examples 1 to 4 are shown below.

<Production of organic EL element>
An organic EL device was produced and evaluated as follows.

[Example 1]
On a glass substrate, a layer (reflective layer) (film thickness 100 nm) of APC (Ag-Pd-Cu), which is a silver alloy, and a layer (film thickness 10 nm) of indium zinc oxide (IZO), Films were formed in this order by sputtering.
Subsequently, this conductive material layer was patterned by etching using a resist pattern as a mask using a normal lithography technique to form an anode. The substrate on which the lower electrode was formed was subjected to ultrasonic cleaning in isopropyl alcohol for 5 minutes, and then UV ozone cleaning for 30 minutes.
Thereafter, compounds HT1 and HA1 were co-deposited using a vacuum evaporation method to form a hole injection layer with a thickness of 10 nm. The concentration of compound HT1 in the hole injection layer was 97% by mass, and the concentration of HA1 was 3% by mass.
Next, the compound HT1 was deposited on the hole injection layer to form a first hole transport layer (HT) with a thickness of 115 nm.
Next, a compound EB1 is deposited on this first hole transport layer to form a second hole transport layer (also referred to as an electron barrier layer) (EBL) with a film thickness of 5 nm.
Compound BH1-1 (first host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (first luminescent compound (BD)) were placed on the second hole transport layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 was 2% by mass. Co-evaporation was performed to form a first light-emitting layer with a thickness of 5 nm.
Compound BH2-1 (second host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (second luminescent compound (BD)) are co-coated on the first light emitting layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass. A second light-emitting layer having a thickness of 5 nm was formed by vapor deposition.
Compound HB1 was deposited on the second light emitting layer to form a first electron transport layer (also referred to as hole blocking layer) (HBL) with a film thickness of 5 nm.
Compound ET1 and compound Liq were co-deposited on the first electron transport layer (HBL) to form a second electron transport layer (ET) with a thickness of 35 nm. The proportion of compound ET1 in this second electron transport layer (ET) was 50% by mass, and the proportion of compound Liq was 50% by mass. Note that Liq is an abbreviation for (8-Quinolinolato)lithium.
Ytterbium (Yb) was deposited on the second electron transport layer to form an electron injection layer with a thickness of 1 nm.
Mg and Ag were deposited on the electron injection layer at a thickness ratio of 10:90 to form a 12 nm thick cathode made of a semi-transparent MgAg alloy. Cap was deposited on the cathode by vacuum evaporation to form a capping layer with a thickness of 65 nm.
The element structure of the organic EL element of Example 1 is schematically shown as follows.
APC(100)/IZO(10)/HT1:HA1(10,97%:3%)/HT1(115)/EB1(5)/BH1-1:BD1(5,98%:2%)/
BH2-1:BD1(5,98%:2%)/HB1(5)/ET1:Liq(35,50%:50%)/Yb(1)/Mg:Ag(12)/Cap(65)
Note that the numbers in parentheses indicate the film thickness (unit: nm).
Similarly, in parentheses, the number expressed as a percentage (97%: 3%) indicates the proportion (mass%) of the compound HT1 and the compound HA1 in the hole injection layer, and the number expressed as a percentage (98%: 2%) indicates the ratio (mass%) of the host material (compound BH1-1 or BH2-1) and the luminescent compound (compound BD1) in the first luminescent layer or the second luminescent layer, and the number expressed as a percentage (50 %: 50%) indicates the ratio (mass %) of compound ET1 and compound Liq in the electron transport layer (ET).

[Example 2]
In the organic EL device of Example 2, the thickness of the second light emitting layer was changed so that the total thickness of the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer was 15 nm, and the second electron transport It was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the thickness of the layer was changed to 30 nm.

[Comparative example 1]
In the organic EL device of Comparative Example 1, the thickness of the second light emitting layer was changed so that the total thickness of the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer was 25 nm, and the second electron transport It was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the thickness of the layer was changed to 20 nm.

[Comparative example 2]
The organic EL device of Comparative Example 2 was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, except that a single-layer light-emitting layer with a thickness of 10 nm was formed in place of the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer.

[Comparative example 3]
The organic EL device of Comparative Example 3 was produced in the same manner as in Example 2, except that a single-layer light-emitting layer with a thickness of 15 nm was formed in place of the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer.

[Comparative example 4]
The organic EL device of Comparative Example 4 was produced in the same manner as Comparative Example 1 except that a single-layer light-emitting layer with a thickness of 25 nm was formed in place of the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer.

<Evaluation of organic EL elements>
The organic EL devices produced in Examples 1 to 2 and Comparative Examples 1 to 4 were evaluated as follows. The evaluation results are shown in Tables 1 and 2.

・Current efficiency L/J
Regarding the organic EL devices produced in Examples 1 to 2 and Comparative Example 1, the spectral radiance spectra were measured using a spectroradiance meter CS-1000 when a voltage was applied to the device so that the current density was 10 mA/cm ² . (manufactured by Konica Minolta). Current efficiency (unit: cd/A) was calculated from the obtained spectral radiance spectrum.
Using the following formula (Equation 30), calculate the current efficiency (cd/A) of each example as "current efficiency (relative value: %)" when the current efficiency (cd/A) of Comparative Example 1 is 100. Ta.
Current efficiency of each example (relative value: %) = (Current efficiency of each example (cd/A)/Current efficiency of comparative example 1 (cd/A)) x 100 (Equation 30)

・External quantum efficiency EQE
Regarding ^the organic EL devices produced in Comparative Examples 2 to 4, the spectral radiance spectra were measured using a spectral radiance meter CS-2000 (manufactured by Konica Minolta, Inc.) when a voltage was applied to the device so that the current density was 10 mA/cm2. ) was measured. From the obtained spectral radiance spectrum, the external quantum efficiency EQE (unit: %) was calculated assuming that Lambassian radiation was performed.
Using the following mathematical formula (Equation 40), the EQE (%) of each example was determined as "EQE (relative value: %)" when the EQE (%) of Comparative Example 4 was set to 100.
EQE of each example (relative value: %) = (EQE of each example (%) / EQE of comparative example 4 (%)) × 100 (Math. 40)

・Maximum peak wavelength λp of light emitted from the element when driving the element
The spectral radiance spectrum was measured using a spectral radiance meter CS-2000 (manufactured by Konica Minolta, Inc.) when a voltage was applied to the organic EL element so that the current density of the element was 10 mA/cm ² . The maximum peak wavelength λp (unit: nm) was calculated from the obtained spectral radiance spectrum.

・Explanation of Tables 1 and 2 In Table 1, the ratio (total thickness of the light-emitting layer/distance between the cathode and the second light-emitting layer) is the ratio (total thickness of the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer). /distance between the cathode and the second light emitting layer).
In Table 2, the ratio (thickness of the light emitting layer/distance between the cathode and the light emitting layer) means the ratio (thickness of the light emitting layer/distance between the cathode and the light emitting layer).

In Examples 1 to 2 and Comparative Example 1 in which the light emitting layer has a laminated structure, from Table 1, Examples 1 to 2 in which the total film thickness is 20 nm or less, compared to Comparative Example 1 in which the total film thickness is 25 nm, EQE has improved.
In Comparative Examples 2 to 4 in which the light-emitting layer has a single-layer structure, Table 2 shows that Comparative Examples 2 to 3, in which the film thickness was 20 nm or less, had lower EQE than Comparative Example 4, in which the film thickness was 25 nm.
Furthermore, in Examples 1 and 2, in which the light emitting layer has a laminated structure and the total film thickness is 10 nm and 15 nm, the EQE is improved compared to Comparative Examples 2 and 3, in which each light emitting layer is replaced with a single layer structure. did.
In an organic EL device with a laminated structure of light emitting layers, the single light emitting region and the TTF light emitting region are functionally separated, which causes the problem that the light emission distribution expands and the light extraction efficiency decreases from the viewpoint of optical interference. . However, in the organic EL devices of Examples 1 and 2 in which the light emitting layer has a laminated structure, by making the light emitting layer thinner, the light emission distribution can be narrowed while maintaining functional separation between the single light emitting region and the TTF light emitting region. , it can be seen that the effect of improving EQE is expressed. On the other hand, in the organic EL devices of Comparative Examples 2 to 4 in which the light emitting layer has a single layer structure, the single light emitting region and the TTF light emitting region are not functionally separated, so even if the light emitting layer is made thinner, the effect of improving EQE is realized. I know it won't happen.

According to the organic EL devices of Examples 1 and 2, the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer include a host material that satisfies the relationship of the above-mentioned formula (Equation 1), and the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer Luminous efficiency can be improved by controlling the total thickness of the light emitting layer and the light emitting layer to 20 nm or less.
Further, according to the organic EL devices of Examples 1 and 2, the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer containing the host material satisfying the relationship of the above formula (Equation 1) are provided, and the ratio (emission EQE can also be improved by setting the total thickness of layers/distance between cathode and second light emitting layer to 0.8 or less.

<Compound evaluation method>
(Triplet energy T ₁ )
The compound to be measured is dissolved in EPA (diethyl ether: isopentane: ethanol = 5:5:2 (volume ratio)) to a concentration of 10 μmol/L, and this solution is placed in a quartz cell for measurement. It was used as a sample. For this measurement sample, measure the phosphorescence spectrum (vertical axis: phosphorescence intensity, horizontal axis: wavelength) at a low temperature (77 [K]), and draw a tangent to the rise of the short wavelength side of this phosphorescence spectrum. , based on the wavelength value λ _edge [nm] at the intersection of the tangent and the horizontal axis, the energy amount calculated from the following conversion formula (F1) was defined as triplet energy T ₁ . Note that the triplet energy T ₁ may have an error of about 0.02 eV in the upper and lower directions depending on the measurement conditions.
Conversion formula (F1): T ₁ [eV] = 1239.85/λ _edge

The tangent to the rise of the short wavelength side of the phosphorescence spectrum is drawn as follows. When moving on the spectrum curve from the short wavelength side of the phosphorescence spectrum to the maximum value on the shortest wavelength side among the maximum values of the spectrum, consider the tangent at each point on the curve toward the long wavelength side. The slope of this tangent line increases as the curve rises (ie, as the vertical axis increases). The tangent drawn at the point where the value of this slope takes the maximum value (that is, the tangent at the inflection point) is the tangent to the rise of the short wavelength side of the phosphorescence spectrum.
Note that a local maximum point with a peak intensity that is 15% or less of the maximum peak intensity of the spectrum is not included in the local maximum value on the shortest wavelength side mentioned above, but is included in the maximum value of the slope that is closest to the local maximum value on the shortest wavelength side. The tangent line drawn at the point where the value is taken is the tangent line to the rise of the short wavelength side of the phosphorescence spectrum.
For the measurement of phosphorescence, an F-4500 spectrofluorometer manufactured by Hitachi High-Technology Co., Ltd. was used.

(Singlet energy S ₁ )
A 10 μmol/L toluene solution of the compound to be measured was prepared and placed in a quartz cell, and the absorption spectrum (vertical axis: absorption intensity, horizontal axis: wavelength) of this sample was measured at room temperature (300K). Draw a tangent to the falling edge of the long wavelength side of this absorption spectrum, and calculate the singlet energy by substituting the wavelength value λedge [nm] at the intersection of the tangent and the horizontal axis into the conversion formula (F2) shown below. did.
Conversion formula (F2): S ₁ [eV] = 1239.85/λedge
As an absorption spectrum measuring device, a spectrophotometer manufactured by Hitachi (device name: U3310) was used.

The tangent to the falling edge of the long wavelength side of the absorption spectrum is drawn as follows. When moving on a spectrum curve in the long wavelength direction from the maximum value on the longest wavelength side among the maximum values of the absorption spectrum, consider tangents at each point on the curve. The slope of this tangent line repeats decreasing and then increasing as the curve falls (that is, as the value on the vertical axis decreases). The tangent line drawn at the point where the slope value takes the minimum value on the longest wavelength side (excluding cases where the absorbance is 0.1 or less) is the tangent to the fall of the long wavelength side of the absorption spectrum.
Note that a maximum point with an absorbance value of 0.2 or less is not included in the maximum value on the longest wavelength side.

Measured values of singlet energy S ₁ and triplet energy T ₁ of compounds BH1-1 and BH2-1 are shown in the table.
The singlet energy S ₁ of compound BD1 was 2.71 eV.
The triplet energy T ₁ of compound BD1 was 2.64 eV.

[Stokes shift (SS) (nm)]
A measurement sample was prepared by dissolving a compound to be measured in toluene at a concentration of 2.0×10 ⁻⁵ mol/L. A measurement sample placed in a quartz cell was irradiated with continuous light in the ultraviolet-visible region at room temperature (300K), and the absorption spectrum (vertical axis: absorbance, horizontal axis: wavelength) was measured. A spectrophotometer model U-3900/3900H manufactured by Hitachi High-Tech Science Co., Ltd. was used for absorption spectrum measurement. Further, a measurement sample was prepared by dissolving a compound to be measured in toluene at a concentration of 4.9×10 ⁻⁶ mol/L. A measurement sample placed in a quartz cell was irradiated with excitation light at room temperature (300K), and the fluorescence spectrum (vertical axis: fluorescence intensity, horizontal axis: wavelength) was measured. For fluorescence spectrum measurement, a spectrofluorometer F-7000 manufactured by Hitachi High-Tech Science Co., Ltd. was used.
From these absorption spectra and fluorescence spectra, the difference between the maximum absorption wavelength and the maximum fluorescence wavelength was calculated to determine the Stokes shift (SS). The unit of Stokes shift SS was nm.
The Stokes shift SS of compound BD1 was 14 nm.

(Preparation of toluene solution)
Compound BD1 was dissolved in toluene at a concentration of 4.9×10 ⁻⁶ mol/L to prepare a toluene solution of compound BD1.

(Measurement of maximum peak wavelength of emission spectrum)
Using a fluorescence spectrum measuring device (spectrofluorometer F-7000 (manufactured by Hitachi High-Tech Science Co., Ltd.)), the maximum peak wavelength when a toluene solution of compound BD1 was excited at 390 nm was measured. Further, the half-value width FWHM (unit: nm) of the maximum peak of compound BD1 was measured from the measured fluorescence spectrum.
The maximum peak wavelength of compound BD1 was 455 nm.
The half width FWHM of the maximum peak of compound BD1 was 23 nm.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1,1A... Organic EL element, 2... Substrate, 3... Anode, 4... Cathode, 51... First light emitting layer, 52... Second light emitting layer, 6... Hole injection layer, 7... Hole transport layer, 8... Electron transport layer, 9... Electron injection layer, 31... Reflective layer, 32... Conductive layer.

Claims (35)

An organic electroluminescent device,
A first light-emitting layer and a second light-emitting layer are included between the anode and the cathode,
The first light-emitting layer includes a first host material,
The second light emitting layer includes a second host material,
the first host material and the second host material are different from each other,
The first light-emitting layer includes at least a first light-emitting compound that emits light with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less,
The second light-emitting layer includes at least a second light-emitting compound that emits light with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less,
The total thickness of the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer is 20 nm or less,
the first luminescent compound and the second luminescent compound are the same or different,
The triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material and the triplet energy T ₁ (H2) of the second host material satisfy the relationship of the following formula (Equation 1),
Organic electroluminescent device.
T ₁ (H1)>T ₁ (H2)...(Math. 1) The organic electroluminescent device according to claim 1,
The thickness of the first light emitting layer is thinner than the thickness of the second light emitting layer.
Organic electroluminescent device. The organic electroluminescent device according to claim 1 or 2,
The thickness of the second light emitting layer is 3 nm or more and 15 nm or less,
Organic electroluminescent device. The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The total thickness of the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer is 17 nm or less,
Organic electroluminescent device. The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The total thickness of the first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer is 15 nm or less,
Organic electroluminescent device. An organic electroluminescent device,
A first light-emitting layer and a second light-emitting layer are included between the anode and the cathode,
The first light-emitting layer includes a first host material,
The second light emitting layer includes a second host material,
the first host material and the second host material are different from each other,
The first light-emitting layer includes at least a first light-emitting compound that emits light with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less,
The second light-emitting layer includes at least a second light-emitting compound that emits light with a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less,
The ratio of the total film thickness of the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer to the distance between the cathode and the second light emitting layer (the ratio of the total film thickness of the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer) the total film thickness of the layers/distance between the cathode and the second light emitting layer) is 0.8 or less,
the first luminescent compound and the second luminescent compound are the same or different,
The triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material and the triplet energy T ₁ (H2) of the second host material satisfy the relationship of the following formula (Equation 1),
Organic electroluminescent device.
T ₁ (H1)>T ₁ (H2)...(Math. 1) The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
the anode is a reflective electrode, and light is extracted from the cathode side;
Organic electroluminescent device. The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
The singlet energy S ₁ (H1) of the first host material and the singlet energy S ₁ (D1) of the first luminescent compound satisfy the relationship of the following formula (Equation 2),
Organic electroluminescent device.
S ₁ (H1)>S ₁ (D1)...(Math. 2) The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
The triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material and the triplet energy T ₁ (D1) of the first luminescent compound satisfy the relationship of the following formula (Equation 2A),
Organic electroluminescent device.
T ₁ (D1)>T ₁ (H1)...(Math. 2A) The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
the first luminescent compound is not a complex;
Organic electroluminescent device. The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 10,
The first luminescent compound and the second luminescent compound are different compounds,
Organic electroluminescent device. The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 10,
The first luminescent compound and the second luminescent compound are the same compound,
Organic electroluminescent device.
The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 12,
The triplet energy T ₁ (D2) of the second luminescent compound and the triplet energy T ₁ (H2) of the second host material satisfy the relationship of the following formula (Equation 3),
Organic electroluminescent device.
T ₁ (D2)>T ₁ (H2)...(Math. 3) The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 13,
The singlet energy S ₁ (H2) of the second host material and the singlet energy S ₁ (D2) of the second luminescent compound satisfy the relationship of the following formula (Equation 4),
Organic electroluminescent device.
S ₁ (H2)>S ₁ (D2)...(Math. 4) The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
the second luminescent compound is not a complex;
Organic electroluminescent device. The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 15,
comprising the first light emitting layer between the anode and the cathode,
comprising the second light emitting layer between the first light emitting layer and the cathode;
Organic electroluminescent device. The organic electroluminescent device according to claim 16,
comprising a hole transport layer between the anode and the first light emitting layer;
Organic electroluminescent device. The organic electroluminescent device according to claim 16 or 17,
an electron transport layer between the second light emitting layer and the cathode;
Organic electroluminescent device. The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 18,
The triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material and the triplet energy T ₁ (H2) of the second host material satisfy the relationship of the following formula (Equation 5),
Organic electroluminescent device.
T ₁ (H1) - T ₁ (H2)>0.03eV...(Math. 5) The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 19,
The organic electroluminescent device emits light having a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less when the device is driven.
Organic electroluminescent device. The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 20,
the first light-emitting layer does not contain a metal complex;
Organic electroluminescent device. The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 21,
the second light-emitting layer does not contain a metal complex;
Organic electroluminescent device. The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 22,
The first light-emitting layer and the second light-emitting layer are in direct contact with each other,
Organic electroluminescent device. The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 23,
The triplet energy T ₁ (DX) of the first luminescent compound or the second luminescent compound and the triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material are expressed by the following formula (Equation 11) satisfies the relationship of
Organic electroluminescent device.
0eV<T ₁ (DX)-T ₁ (H1)<0.6eV (Math. 11) The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 24,
The triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material satisfies the relationship of the following formula (Equation 12),
Organic electroluminescent device.
T ₁ (H1)>2.0eV...(Math. 12) The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 25,
The triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material satisfies the relationship of the following formula (Equation 12A),
Organic electroluminescent device.
T ₁ (H1)>2.10eV...(Math. 12A) The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 26,
The triplet energy T ₁ (H1) of the first host material satisfies the relationship of the following formula (Equation 12C),
Organic electroluminescent device.
2.08eV>T ₁ (H1)>1.87eV...(Math. 12C) The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 27,
The triplet energy T ₁ (H2) of the second host material satisfies the relationship of the following formula (Equation 13),
Organic electroluminescent device.
T ₁ (H2)≧1.9eV (Math. 13) The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 28,
The first host material has a connected structure including a benzene ring and a naphthalene ring connected by a single bond in the molecule,
The benzene ring and the naphthalene ring in the connected structure are each independently further fused with a single ring or a fused ring, or are not fused,
The benzene ring and the naphthalene ring in the connected structure are further connected by crosslinking at at least one portion other than the single bond,
Organic electroluminescent device. The organic electroluminescent device according to claim 29,
the crosslink includes a double bond,
Organic electroluminescent device. The organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 30,
The first host material has a biphenyl structure in which a first benzene ring and a second benzene ring are connected by a single bond in the molecule,
The first benzene ring and the second benzene ring in the biphenyl structure are further connected by crosslinking at at least one moiety other than the single bond,
Organic electroluminescent device. The organic electroluminescent device according to claim 31,
The first benzene ring and the second benzene ring in the biphenyl structure are further connected by the bridge at one part other than the single bond,
Organic electroluminescent device. The organic electroluminescent device according to claim 31 or 32,
the crosslink includes a double bond,
Organic electroluminescent device. The organic electroluminescent device according to claim 31,
The first benzene ring and the second benzene ring in the biphenyl structure are further connected by the bridge at two parts other than the single bond,
the crosslink does not include a double bond;
Organic electroluminescent device. An electronic device equipped with the organic electroluminescent device according to any one of claims 1 to 34.

Images